x86: Support Intel Shadow Stack with SHSTK property
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
832 @item -plugin @var{name}
833 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837 wish.
838
839 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845 just copy in the newest one.
846
847 @kindex --push-state
848 @cindex push state governing input file handling
849 @item --push-state
850 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864 something as follows:
865
866 @smallexample
867 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868 @end smallexample
869
870 @kindex --pop-state
871 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
872 @item --pop-state
873 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874 flags governing input file handling.
875
876 @kindex -q
877 @kindex --emit-relocs
878 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
879 @item -q
880 @itemx --emit-relocs
881 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
882 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884 in larger executables.
885
886 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
888 @kindex --force-dynamic
889 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890 @item --force-dynamic
891 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892 to VxWorks targets.
893
894 @cindex partial link
895 @cindex relocatable output
896 @kindex -r
897 @kindex --relocatable
898 @item -r
899 @itemx --relocatable
900 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
901 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
902 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904 @code{OMAGIC}.
905 @c ; see @option{-N}.
906 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
910 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914 with input files in other formats at all.
915
916 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918 @kindex -R @var{file}
919 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920 @cindex symbol-only input
921 @item -R @var{filename}
922 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926 programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
928 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
929 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
930 the @option{-rpath} option.
931
932 @kindex -s
933 @kindex --strip-all
934 @cindex strip all symbols
935 @item -s
936 @itemx --strip-all
937 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939 @kindex -S
940 @kindex --strip-debug
941 @cindex strip debugger symbols
942 @item -S
943 @itemx --strip-debug
944 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
946 @kindex --strip-discarded
947 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
948 @item --strip-discarded
949 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
950 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951 Enabled by default.
952
953 @kindex -t
954 @kindex --trace
955 @cindex input files, displaying
956 @item -t
957 @itemx --trace
958 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
959
960 @kindex -T @var{script}
961 @kindex --script=@var{script}
962 @cindex script files
963 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
964 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
966 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
967 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
968 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971 options accumulate.
972
973 @kindex -dT @var{script}
974 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975 @cindex script files
976 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987 @samp{gcc}).
988
989 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
990 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991 @cindex undefined symbol
992 @item -u @var{symbol}
993 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
1000 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003 instead.
1004
1005 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006 @cindex symbols, require defined
1007 @cindex defined symbol
1008 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
1016 @kindex -Ur
1017 @cindex constructors
1018 @item -Ur
1019 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1021 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1022 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026 @samp{-r} for the others.
1027
1028 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029 @cindex orphan sections
1030 @cindex sections, orphan
1031 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037 @table @code
1038 @item place
1039 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1041 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1042
1043 @item discard
1044 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047 @item warn
1048 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049 issue a warning.
1050
1051 @item error
1052 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053 @end table
1054
1055 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
1057 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065 in a linker script.
1066
1067 @kindex -v
1068 @kindex -V
1069 @kindex --version
1070 @cindex version
1071 @item -v
1072 @itemx --version
1073 @itemx -V
1074 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1075 lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077 @kindex -x
1078 @kindex --discard-all
1079 @cindex deleting local symbols
1080 @item -x
1081 @itemx --discard-all
1082 Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084 @kindex -X
1085 @kindex --discard-locals
1086 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1087 @item -X
1088 @itemx --discard-locals
1089 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1092
1093 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095 @cindex symbol tracing
1096 @item -y @var{symbol}
1097 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100 to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1106 @item -Y @var{path}
1107 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108 for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111 @item -z @var{keyword}
1112 The recognized keywords are:
1113 @table @samp
1114
1115 @item combreloc
1116 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117 lookup caching possible.
1118
1119 @item common
1120 Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121 link.
1122
1123 @item defs
1124 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1125 shared libraries are still allowed.
1126
1127 @item execstack
1128 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
1130 @item global
1131 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
1135 @item initfirst
1136 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141 objects.
1142
1143 @item interpose
1144 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145 but the primary executable.
1146
1147 @item lazy
1148 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151 Lazy binding is the default.
1152
1153 @item loadfltr
1154 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155 runtime.
1156
1157 @item muldefs
1158 Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160 @item nocombreloc
1161 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
1163 @item nocommon
1164 Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165 link.
1166
1167 @item nocopyreloc
1168 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1170
1171 @item nodefaultlib
1172 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173 ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175 @item nodelete
1176 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178 @item nodlopen
1179 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181 @item nodump
1182 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
1184 @item noexecstack
1185 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
1187 @item text
1188 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190 @item notext
1191 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193 @item textoff
1194 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
1196 @item norelro
1197 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
1199 @item now
1200 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204 first called.
1205
1206 @item origin
1207 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
1209 @item relro
1210 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
1212 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
1218 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1219 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
1223 @item bndplt
1224 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
1226 @item noextern-protected-data
1227 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1231 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1232 i386 and x86-64.
1233
1234 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237 by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238 option.
1239
1240 @item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1241 Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242 object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243 @option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244 are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245 make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
1246
1247 @item noreloc-overflow
1248 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
1252 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1253 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1259 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
1264 @item ibtplt
1265 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1266 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1267
1268 @item IBT
1269 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1270 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1271 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1272
1273 @item shstk
1274 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1275 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1276 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1277
1278 @end table
1279
1280 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1281
1282 @kindex -(
1283 @cindex groups of archives
1284 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1285 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1286 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1287 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1288
1289 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1290 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1291 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1292 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1293 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1294 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1295 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1296 resolved.
1297
1298 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1299 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1300 more archives.
1301
1302 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1303 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1304 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1305 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1306 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1307 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1308 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1309 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1310 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1311 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1312 restore the old behaviour.
1313
1314 @kindex --as-needed
1315 @kindex --no-as-needed
1316 @item --as-needed
1317 @itemx --no-as-needed
1318 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1319 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1320 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1321 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1322 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1323 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1324 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1325 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1326 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1327 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1328 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1329 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1330 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1331
1332 @kindex --add-needed
1333 @kindex --no-add-needed
1334 @item --add-needed
1335 @itemx --no-add-needed
1336 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1337 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1338 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1339 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1340
1341 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1342 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1343 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1344
1345 @kindex -Bdynamic
1346 @kindex -dy
1347 @kindex -call_shared
1348 @item -Bdynamic
1349 @itemx -dy
1350 @itemx -call_shared
1351 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1352 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1353 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1354 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1355 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1356 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1357
1358 @kindex -Bgroup
1359 @item -Bgroup
1360 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1361 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1362 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1363 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1364 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1365
1366 @kindex -Bstatic
1367 @kindex -dn
1368 @kindex -non_shared
1369 @kindex -static
1370 @item -Bstatic
1371 @itemx -dn
1372 @itemx -non_shared
1373 @itemx -static
1374 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1375 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1376 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1377 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1378 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1379 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1380 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1381 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1382 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1383 libraries.
1384
1385 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1386 @item -Bsymbolic
1387 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1388 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1389 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1390 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1391 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1392 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1393 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1394 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1395
1396 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1397 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1398 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1399 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1400 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1401 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1402 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1403 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1404 libraries and position independent executables.
1405
1406 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1408 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1409 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1410 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1411 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1412 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1413 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1414 which support shared libraries.
1415
1416 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1417 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1418
1419 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1420 @item --dynamic-list-data
1421 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1422
1423 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1425 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1426 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1427
1428 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1430 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1431
1432 @kindex --check-sections
1433 @kindex --no-check-sections
1434 @item --check-sections
1435 @itemx --no-check-sections
1436 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1437 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1438 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1439 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1440 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1441 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1442 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1443 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1444 option.
1445
1446 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1447 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1448 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1449 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1450 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1451 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1452 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1453 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1454 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1455 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1456 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1457 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1458
1459 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1460 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1461 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1462 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1463 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1464 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1465 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1466 symbols.
1467
1468 @cindex cross reference table
1469 @kindex --cref
1470 @item --cref
1471 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1472 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1473 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1474
1475 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1476 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1477 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1478 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1479 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1480 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1481 symbol are listed.
1482
1483 @cindex common allocation
1484 @kindex --no-define-common
1485 @item --no-define-common
1486 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1487 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1488 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1489
1490 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1491 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1492 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1493 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1494 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1495 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1496 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1497 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1498 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1499 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1500
1501 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1502 @cindex section groups
1503 @cindex COMDAT
1504 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1505 @item --force-group-allocation
1506 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1507 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1508 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1509 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1510 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1511 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1512
1513 @cindex symbols, from command line
1514 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1515 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1516 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1517 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1518 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1519 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1520 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1521 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1522 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1523 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1524 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1525 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1526
1527 @cindex demangling, from command line
1528 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1529 @kindex --no-demangle
1530 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1531 @itemx --no-demangle
1532 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1533 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1534 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1535 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1536 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1537 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1538 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1539 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1540 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1541
1542 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1543 @kindex -I@var{file}
1544 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1545 @item -I@var{file}
1546 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1547 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1548 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1549 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1550 doing.
1551
1552 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1553 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1554 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1555 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1556 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1557 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1558
1559 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1560 @item --embedded-relocs
1561 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1562 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1563 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1564 targets.
1565
1566 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1567 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1568 @item --fatal-warnings
1569 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1570 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1571 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1572
1573 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1574 @item --force-exe-suffix
1575 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1576
1577 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1578 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1579 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1580 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1581 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1582 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1583
1584 @kindex --gc-sections
1585 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1586 @cindex garbage collection
1587 @item --gc-sections
1588 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1589 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1590 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1591 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1592 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1593 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1594 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1595
1596 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1597 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1598 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1599 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1600 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1601 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1602 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1603 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1604 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1605
1606 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1607 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1608 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1609 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1610
1611 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1612 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1613 @cindex garbage collection
1614 @item --print-gc-sections
1615 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1616 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1617 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1618 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1619 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1620 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1621 line.
1622
1623 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1624 @cindex garbage collection
1625 @item --gc-keep-exported
1626 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1627 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1628 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1629 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1630 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1631 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1632 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1633 ELF format targets.
1634
1635 @kindex --print-output-format
1636 @cindex output format
1637 @item --print-output-format
1638 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1639 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1640 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1641
1642 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1643 @cindex memory usage
1644 @item --print-memory-usage
1645 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1646 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1647 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1648 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1649 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1650
1651 @smallexample
1652 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1653 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1654 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1655 @end smallexample
1656
1657 @cindex help
1658 @cindex usage
1659 @kindex --help
1660 @item --help
1661 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1662
1663 @kindex --target-help
1664 @item --target-help
1665 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1666
1667 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1668 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1669 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1670 @option{-M} option, above.
1671
1672 @cindex memory usage
1673 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1674 @item --no-keep-memory
1675 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1676 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1677 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1678 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1679 while linking a large executable.
1680
1681 @kindex --no-undefined
1682 @kindex -z defs
1683 @item --no-undefined
1684 @itemx -z defs
1685 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1686 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1687 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1688 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1689 libraries being linked in.
1690
1691 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1692 @kindex -z muldefs
1693 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1694 @itemx -z muldefs
1695 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1696 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1697 first definition will be used.
1698
1699 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1700 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1701 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1702 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1703 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1704 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1705 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1706 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1707 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1708
1709 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1710 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1711 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1712 a shared library.
1713
1714 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1715 libraries specified at link time are that:
1716
1717 @itemize @bullet
1718 @item
1719 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1720 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1721 resolvable at load time.
1722 @item
1723 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1724 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1725
1726 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1727 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1728 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1729 appropriate memset function.
1730 @end itemize
1731
1732 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1733 @item --no-undefined-version
1734 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1735 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1736 will be issued instead.
1737
1738 @kindex --default-symver
1739 @item --default-symver
1740 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1741 exported symbols.
1742
1743 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1744 @item --default-imported-symver
1745 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1746 imported symbols.
1747
1748 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1749 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1750 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1751 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1752 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1753 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1754 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1755 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1756 inappropriate.
1757
1758 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1759 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1760 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1761 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1762
1763 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1764 @item --no-whole-archive
1765 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1766 archive files.
1767
1768 @cindex output file after errors
1769 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1770 @item --noinhibit-exec
1771 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1772 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1773 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1774 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1775
1776 @kindex -nostdlib
1777 @item -nostdlib
1778 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1779 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1780 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1781
1782 @ifclear SingleFormat
1783 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1784 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1785 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1786 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1787 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1788 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1789 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1790 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1791 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1792 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1793 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1794 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1795 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1796 @end ifclear
1797
1798 @kindex --out-implib
1799 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1800 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1801 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1802 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1803 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1804 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1805 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1806 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1807
1808 @kindex -pie
1809 @kindex --pic-executable
1810 @item -pie
1811 @itemx --pic-executable
1812 @cindex position independent executables
1813 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1814 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1815 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1816 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1817 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1818 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1819
1820 @kindex -qmagic
1821 @item -qmagic
1822 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1823
1824 @kindex -Qy
1825 @item -Qy
1826 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1827
1828 @kindex --relax
1829 @cindex synthesizing linker
1830 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1831 @cindex --no-relax
1832 @item --relax
1833 @itemx --no-relax
1834 An option with machine dependent effects.
1835 @ifset GENERIC
1836 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1837 @end ifset
1838 @ifset H8300
1839 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1840 @end ifset
1841 @ifset I960
1842 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1843 @end ifset
1844 @ifset XTENSA
1845 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1846 @end ifset
1847 @ifset M68HC11
1848 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1849 @end ifset
1850 @ifset NIOSII
1851 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1852 @end ifset
1853 @ifset POWERPC
1854 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1855 @end ifset
1856
1857 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1858 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1859 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1860 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1861 instructions, and combining constant values.
1862
1863 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1864 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1865 @ifset GENERIC
1866 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1867 family of processors.
1868 @end ifset
1869
1870 @ifset GENERIC
1871 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1872 but ignored.
1873 @end ifset
1874
1875 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1876 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1877
1878 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1879 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1880 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1881 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1882 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1883 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1884 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1885 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1886 @ifset GENERIC
1887 (such as VxWorks)
1888 @end ifset
1889 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1890 run-time memory.
1891
1892 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1893 or symbols needed for relocations.
1894
1895 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1896 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1897
1898 @ifset GENERIC
1899 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1900 @cindex runtime library search path
1901 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1902 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1903 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1904 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1905 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1906 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1907 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1908 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1909 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1910 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1911
1912 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1913 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1914 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1915 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1916 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1917 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1918 file systems.
1919
1920 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1921 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1922 the @option{-rpath} option.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 @ifset GENERIC
1926 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1927 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1928 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1929 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1930 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1931 of the input files.
1932
1933 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1934 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1935 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1936 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1937 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1938 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1939 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1940 appearing multiple times.
1941
1942 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1943 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1944 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1945 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1946 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1947
1948 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1949 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1950 supported.
1951
1952 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1953 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1954 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1955 runtime linker would do.
1956
1957 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1958 libraries:
1959 @enumerate
1960 @item
1961 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1962 @item
1963 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1964 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1965 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1966 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1967 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1968 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1969 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1970 @item
1971 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1972 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1973 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1974 @item
1975 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1976 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1977 @item
1978 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1979 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1980 @item
1981 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1982 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1983 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1984 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1985 @item
1986 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1987 @item
1988 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1989 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1990 @end enumerate
1991
1992 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1993 warning and continue with the link.
1994 @end ifset
1995
1996 @kindex -shared
1997 @kindex -Bshareable
1998 @item -shared
1999 @itemx -Bshareable
2000 @cindex shared libraries
2001 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2002 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2003 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2004 undefined symbols in the link.
2005
2006 @kindex --sort-common
2007 @item --sort-common
2008 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2009 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2010 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2011 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2012 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2013 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2014 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2015 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2016
2017 @kindex --sort-section=name
2018 @item --sort-section=name
2019 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2020 patterns in the linker script.
2021
2022 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2023 @item --sort-section=alignment
2024 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2025 patterns in the linker script.
2026
2027 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2028 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2029 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2030 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2031 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2032
2033 @kindex --split-by-file
2034 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2035 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2036 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2037 size of 1 if not given.
2038
2039 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2040 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2041 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2042 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2043 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2044 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2045 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2046 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2047 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2048 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2049 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2050 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2051
2052 @kindex --stats
2053 @item --stats
2054 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2055 as execution time and memory usage.
2056
2057 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2058 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2059 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2060 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2061 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2062
2063 @kindex --task-link
2064 @item --task-link
2065 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2066 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2067
2068 @kindex --traditional-format
2069 @cindex traditional format
2070 @item --traditional-format
2071 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2072 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2073 use the traditional format instead.
2074
2075 @cindex dbx
2076 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2077 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2078 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2079 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2080 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2081 combine duplicate entries.
2082
2083 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2084 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2085 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2086 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2087 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2088 line.
2089 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2090 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2091 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2092 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2093 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2094
2095 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2096 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2097 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2098 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2099 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2100 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2101 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2102 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2103 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2104
2105 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2106 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2107 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2108 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2109 byte of the text segment.
2110
2111 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2112 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2113 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2114 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2115 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2116 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2117
2118 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2119 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2120 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2121 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2122 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2123
2124 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2125 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2126 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2127 values for @samp{method}:
2128
2129 @table @samp
2130 @item ignore-all
2131 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2132
2133 @item report-all
2134 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2135
2136 @item ignore-in-object-files
2137 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2138 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2139
2140 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2141 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2142 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2143 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2144 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2145 command line.
2146 @end table
2147
2148 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2149 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2150
2151 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2152 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2153 can change this to a warning.
2154
2155 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2156 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2157 @item --dll-verbose
2158 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2159 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2160 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2161 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2162 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2163
2164 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2165 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2166 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2167 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2168 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2169 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2170 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2171 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2172 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2173 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2174 @xref{WIN32}.
2175
2176 @kindex --warn-common
2177 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2178 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2179 @item --warn-common
2180 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2181 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2182 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2183 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2184 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2185 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2186
2187 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2188
2189 @table @samp
2190 @item int i = 1;
2191 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2192 file.
2193
2194 @item extern int i;
2195 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2196 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2197 variable somewhere.
2198
2199 @item int i;
2200 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2201 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2202 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2203 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2204 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2205 a definition of the same variable.
2206 @end table
2207
2208 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2209 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2210 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2211 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2212 a common symbol.
2213
2214 @enumerate
2215 @item
2216 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2217 definition for the symbol.
2218 @smallexample
2219 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2220 overridden by definition
2221 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2222 @end smallexample
2223
2224 @item
2225 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2226 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2227 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2228 @smallexample
2229 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2230 overriding common
2231 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2232 @end smallexample
2233
2234 @item
2235 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2236 @smallexample
2237 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2238 of `@var{symbol}'
2239 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2240 @end smallexample
2241
2242 @item
2243 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2244 @smallexample
2245 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2246 overridden by larger common
2247 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2248 @end smallexample
2249
2250 @item
2251 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2252 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2253 encountered in a different order.
2254 @smallexample
2255 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2256 overriding smaller common
2257 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2258 @end smallexample
2259 @end enumerate
2260
2261 @kindex --warn-constructors
2262 @item --warn-constructors
2263 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2264 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2265 detect the use of global constructors.
2266
2267 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2268 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2269 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2270 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2271 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2272 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2273 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2274 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2275 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2276 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2277 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2278 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2279 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2280
2281 @kindex --warn-once
2282 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2283 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2284 @item --warn-once
2285 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2286 which refers to it.
2287
2288 @kindex --warn-section-align
2289 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2290 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2291 @item --warn-section-align
2292 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2293 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2294 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2295 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2296 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2297
2298 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2299 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2300 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2301
2302 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2303 @item --warn-alternate-em
2304 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2305
2306 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2307 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2308 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2309 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2310 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2311
2312 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2313 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2314 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2315 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2316
2317 @kindex --whole-archive
2318 @cindex including an entire archive
2319 @item --whole-archive
2320 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2321 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2322 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2323 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2324 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2325 library. This option may be used more than once.
2326
2327 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2328 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2329 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2330 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2331 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2332
2333 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2334 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2335 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2336 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2337 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2338 @var{symbol}.
2339
2340 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2341 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2342 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2343 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2344
2345 Here is a trivial example:
2346
2347 @smallexample
2348 void *
2349 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2350 @{
2351 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2352 return __real_malloc (c);
2353 @}
2354 @end smallexample
2355
2356 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2357 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2358 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2359 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2360
2361 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2362 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2363 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2364 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2365 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2366
2367 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2368 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2369 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2370 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2371 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2372 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2373 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2374
2375 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2376 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2377 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2378 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2379 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2380
2381 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2382 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2383 @item --enable-new-dtags
2384 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2385 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2386 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2387 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2388 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2389 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2390 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2391 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2392
2393 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2394 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2395 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2396 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2397 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2398 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2399 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2400
2401 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2402 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2403 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2404 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2405 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2406 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2407 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2408
2409 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2410 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2411 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2412 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2413 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2414 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2415 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2416 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2417 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2418 compressed using zlib.
2419
2420 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2421 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2422 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2423 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2424 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2425 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2426
2427 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2428 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2429
2430 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2431 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2432 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2433 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2434
2435 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2436 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2437 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2438 @option{--help} option.
2439
2440 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2441 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2442 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2443 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2444 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2445 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2446
2447 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2448 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2449 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2450 has been used.
2451
2452 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2453 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2454
2455 @kindex --build-id
2456 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2457 @item --build-id
2458 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2459 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2460 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2461 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2462 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2463 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2464 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2465 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2466 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2467 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2468 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2469
2470 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2471 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2472 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2473 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2474 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2475 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2476
2477 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2478 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2479 @end table
2480
2481 @c man end
2482
2483 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2484
2485 @c man begin OPTIONS
2486
2487 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2488 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2489 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2490 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2491 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2492 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2493 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2494 object file).
2495
2496 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2497 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2498 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2499 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2500
2501 @table @gcctabopt
2502
2503 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2504 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2505 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2506 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2507 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2508
2509 @kindex --base-file
2510 @item --base-file @var{file}
2511 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2512 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2513 @file{dlltool}.
2514 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2515
2516 @kindex --dll
2517 @item --dll
2518 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2519 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2520 file.
2521 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2522
2523 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2524 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2525 @item --enable-long-section-names
2526 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2527 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2528 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2529 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2530 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2531 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2532 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2533 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2534 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2535 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2536 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2537 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2538 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2539 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2540 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2541 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2542 image and not stripping symbols.
2543 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2544
2545 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2546 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2547 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2548 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2549 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2550 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2551 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2552 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2553 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2554 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2555 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2556 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2557 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2558 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2559 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2560 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2561 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2562 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2563
2564 @kindex --leading-underscore
2565 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2566 @item --leading-underscore
2567 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2568 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2569 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2570 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2571
2572 @cindex DLLs, creating
2573 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2574 @item --export-all-symbols
2575 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2576 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2577 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2578 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2579 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2580 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2581 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2582 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2583 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2584 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2585 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2586 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2587 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2588 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2589 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2590 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2591 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2592 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2593 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2594 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2595 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2596 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2597 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2598
2599 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2600 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2601 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2602 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2603 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2604
2605 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2606 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2607 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2608 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2609
2610 @kindex --file-alignment
2611 @item --file-alignment
2612 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2613 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2614 512.
2615 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2616
2617 @cindex heap size
2618 @kindex --heap
2619 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2620 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2621 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2622 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2623 committed.
2624 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2625
2626 @cindex image base
2627 @kindex --image-base
2628 @item --image-base @var{value}
2629 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2630 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2631 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2632 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2633 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2634 for dlls.
2635 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2636
2637 @kindex --kill-at
2638 @item --kill-at
2639 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2640 symbols before they are exported.
2641 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2642
2643 @kindex --large-address-aware
2644 @item --large-address-aware
2645 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2646 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2647 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2648 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2649 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2650 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2651
2652 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2653 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2654 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2655 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2656 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2657 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2658 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2659
2660 @kindex --major-image-version
2661 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2662 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2663 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2664
2665 @kindex --major-os-version
2666 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2667 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2668 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2669
2670 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2671 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2672 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2673 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2674
2675 @kindex --minor-image-version
2676 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2677 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --minor-os-version
2681 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2682 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2686 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2687 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2688 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2689
2690 @cindex DEF files, creating
2691 @cindex DLLs, creating
2692 @kindex --output-def
2693 @item --output-def @var{file}
2694 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2695 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2696 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2697 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2698 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2699 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2700
2701 @cindex DLLs, creating
2702 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2703 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2704 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2705 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2706 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2707 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2708 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2709 execution are avoided.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2713 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2714 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2715 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2716 default.
2717 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2718
2719 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2720 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2721 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2722 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2723 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2724 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2725 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2726 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2727 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2728 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2729
2730 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2731 @item --enable-auto-import
2732 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2733 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2734 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2735 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2736 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2737 specification published by Microsoft.
2738
2739 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2740 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2741 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2742 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2743 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2744
2745 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2746 see this message:
2747
2748 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2749 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2750
2751 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2752 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2753 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2754 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2755 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2756 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2757 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2758 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2759 the warning, and exit.
2760
2761 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2762 data type of the exported variable:
2763
2764 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2765 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2766 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2767
2768 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2769 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2770 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2771 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2772
2773 @example
2774 extern type extern_array[];
2775 extern_array[1] -->
2776 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2777 @end example
2778
2779 or
2780
2781 @example
2782 extern type extern_array[];
2783 extern_array[1] -->
2784 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2785 @end example
2786
2787 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2788 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2789
2790 @example
2791 extern struct s extern_struct;
2792 extern_struct.field -->
2793 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2794 @end example
2795
2796 or
2797
2798 @example
2799 extern long long extern_ll;
2800 extern_ll -->
2801 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2802 @end example
2803
2804 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2805 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2806 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2807 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2808 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2809 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2810 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2811 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2812
2813 Original:
2814 @example
2815 --foo.h
2816 extern int arr[];
2817 --foo.c
2818 #include "foo.h"
2819 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2820 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2821 @}
2822 @end example
2823
2824 Solution 1:
2825 @example
2826 --foo.h
2827 extern int arr[];
2828 --foo.c
2829 #include "foo.h"
2830 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2831 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2832 volatile int *parr = arr;
2833 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2834 @}
2835 @end example
2836
2837 Solution 2:
2838 @example
2839 --foo.h
2840 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2841 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2842 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2843 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2844 #else
2845 #define FOO_IMPORT
2846 #endif
2847 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2848 --foo.c
2849 #include "foo.h"
2850 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2851 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2852 @}
2853 @end example
2854
2855 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2856 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2857 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2858 functions).
2859 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2860
2861 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2862 @item --disable-auto-import
2863 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2864 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2865 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2866
2867 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2868 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2869 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2870 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2871 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2872 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2873 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2874
2875 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2877 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2878 DLLs.
2879 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2880
2881 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2882 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2883 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2884 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2885
2886 @kindex --section-alignment
2887 @item --section-alignment
2888 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2889 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2890 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2891
2892 @cindex stack size
2893 @kindex --stack
2894 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2895 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2896 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2897 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2898 committed.
2899 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2900
2901 @kindex --subsystem
2902 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2903 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2904 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2905 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2906 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2907 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2908 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2909 @var{which}.
2910 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2911
2912 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2913 of the PE file header:
2914 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2915
2916 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2917 @item --high-entropy-va
2918 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2919 (ASLR).
2920
2921 @kindex --dynamicbase
2922 @item --dynamicbase
2923 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2924 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2925 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2926
2927 @kindex --forceinteg
2928 @item --forceinteg
2929 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2930
2931 @kindex --nxcompat
2932 @item --nxcompat
2933 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2934 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2935
2936 @kindex --no-isolation
2937 @item --no-isolation
2938 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2939
2940 @kindex --no-seh
2941 @item --no-seh
2942 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2943 this image.
2944
2945 @kindex --no-bind
2946 @item --no-bind
2947 Do not bind this image.
2948
2949 @kindex --wdmdriver
2950 @item --wdmdriver
2951 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2952
2953 @kindex --tsaware
2954 @item --tsaware
2955 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2956
2957 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2958 @item --insert-timestamp
2959 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2960 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2961 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2962 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2963 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2964 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2965 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2966 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2967 identically.
2968 @end table
2969
2970 @c man end
2971
2972 @ifset C6X
2973 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2974
2975 @c man begin OPTIONS
2976
2977 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2978 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2979 all executables use an index of 0.
2980
2981 @table @gcctabopt
2982
2983 @kindex --dsbt-size
2984 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2985 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2986 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2987 entries.
2988
2989 @kindex --dsbt-index
2990 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2991 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2992 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2993 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2994 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2995
2996 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2997 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2998 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2999
3000 @end table
3001
3002 @c man end
3003 @end ifset
3004
3005 @ifset M68HC11
3006 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3007
3008 @c man begin OPTIONS
3009
3010 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3011 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3012
3013 @table @gcctabopt
3014
3015 @kindex --no-trampoline
3016 @item --no-trampoline
3017 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3018 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3019 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3020
3021 @kindex --bank-window
3022 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3023 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3024 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3025 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3026 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3027
3028 @end table
3029
3030 @c man end
3031 @end ifset
3032
3033 @ifset M68K
3034 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3035
3036 @c man begin OPTIONS
3037
3038 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3039 when linking for 68K targets.
3040
3041 @table @gcctabopt
3042
3043 @kindex --got
3044 @item --got=@var{type}
3045 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3046 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3047 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3048 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3049
3050 @end table
3051
3052 @c man end
3053 @end ifset
3054
3055 @ifset MIPS
3056 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3057
3058 @c man begin OPTIONS
3059
3060 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3061 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3062 linking for MIPS targets.
3063
3064 @table @gcctabopt
3065
3066 @kindex --insn32
3067 @item --insn32
3068 @kindex --no-insn32
3069 @itemx --no-insn32
3070 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3071 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3072 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3073 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3074 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3075 possible.
3076
3077 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3078 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3079 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3080 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3081 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3082 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3083 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3084 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3085 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3086 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3087 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3088 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3089 an error.
3090
3091 @end table
3092
3093 @c man end
3094 @end ifset
3095
3096 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3097 @node Environment
3098 @section Environment Variables
3099
3100 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3101
3102 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3103 @ifclear SingleFormat
3104 @code{GNUTARGET},
3105 @end ifclear
3106 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3107
3108 @ifclear SingleFormat
3109 @kindex GNUTARGET
3110 @cindex default input format
3111 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3112 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3113 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3114 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3115 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3116 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3117 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3118 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3119 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3120 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3121 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3122 @end ifclear
3123
3124 @kindex LDEMULATION
3125 @cindex default emulation
3126 @cindex emulation, default
3127 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3128 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3129 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3130 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3131 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3132 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3133 linker was configured.
3134
3135 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3136 @cindex demangling, default
3137 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3138 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3139 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3140 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3141 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3142 options.
3143
3144 @c man end
3145 @end ifset
3146
3147 @node Scripts
3148 @chapter Linker Scripts
3149
3150 @cindex scripts
3151 @cindex linker scripts
3152 @cindex command files
3153 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3154 written in the linker command language.
3155
3156 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3157 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3158 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3159 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3160 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3161 described below.
3162
3163 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3164 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3165 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3166 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3167 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3168
3169 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3170 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3171 default linker script.
3172
3173 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3174 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3175 Linker Scripts}.
3176
3177 @menu
3178 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3179 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3180 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3181 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3182 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3183 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3184 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3185 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3186 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3187 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3188 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3189 @end menu
3190
3191 @node Basic Script Concepts
3192 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3193 @cindex linker script concepts
3194 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3195 describe the linker script language.
3196
3197 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3198 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3199 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3200 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3201 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3202 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3203 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3204 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3205
3206 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3207 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3208 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3209 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3210 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3211 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3212 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3213 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3214 of debugging information.
3215
3216 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3217 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3218 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3219 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3220 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3221 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3222 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3223 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3224 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3225 RAM address would be the VMA.
3226
3227 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3228 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3229
3230 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3231 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3232 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3233 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3234 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3235 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3236 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3237
3238 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3239 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3240 option.
3241
3242 @node Script Format
3243 @section Linker Script Format
3244 @cindex linker script format
3245 Linker scripts are text files.
3246
3247 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3248 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3249 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3250 generally ignored.
3251
3252 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3253 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3254 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3255 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3256 file name.
3257
3258 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3259 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3260 to whitespace.
3261
3262 @node Simple Example
3263 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3264 @cindex linker script example
3265 @cindex example of linker script
3266 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3267
3268 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3269 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3270 memory layout of the output file.
3271
3272 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3273 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3274 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3275 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3276 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3277 your input files.
3278
3279 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3280 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3281 linker script which will do that:
3282 @smallexample
3283 SECTIONS
3284 @{
3285 . = 0x10000;
3286 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3287 . = 0x8000000;
3288 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3289 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3290 @}
3291 @end smallexample
3292
3293 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3294 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3295 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3296
3297 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3298 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3299 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3300 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3301 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3302 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3303 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3304
3305 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3306 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3307 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3308 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3309 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3310 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3311
3312 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3313 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3314 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3315
3316 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3317 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3318 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3319 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3320 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3321 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3322 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3323
3324 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3325 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3326 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3327 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3328 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3329 sections.
3330
3331 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3332
3333 @node Simple Commands
3334 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3335 @cindex linker script simple commands
3336 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3337
3338 @menu
3339 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3340 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3341 @ifclear SingleFormat
3342 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3343 @end ifclear
3344
3345 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3346 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3347 @end menu
3348
3349 @node Entry Point
3350 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3351 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3352 @cindex start of execution
3353 @cindex first instruction
3354 @cindex entry point
3355 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3356 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3357 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3358 @smallexample
3359 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3360 @end smallexample
3361
3362 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3363 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3364 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3365 @itemize @bullet
3366 @item
3367 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3368 @item
3369 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3370 @item
3371 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3372 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3373 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3374 @item
3375 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3376 @item
3377 The address @code{0}.
3378 @end itemize
3379
3380 @node File Commands
3381 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3382 @cindex linker script file commands
3383 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3384
3385 @table @code
3386 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3387 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3388 @cindex including a linker script
3389 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3390 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3391 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3392 10 levels deep.
3393
3394 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3395 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3396
3397 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3398 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3399 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3400 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3401 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3402 @cindex linker script input object files
3403 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3404 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3405
3406 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3407 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3408 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3409
3410 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3411 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3412
3413 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3414 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3415 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3416 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3417 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3418 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3419 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3420 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3421 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3422 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3423
3424 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3425 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3426 @samp{-l}.
3427
3428 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3429 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3430 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3431
3432 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3433 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3434 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3435 @cindex grouping input files
3436 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3437 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3438 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3439 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3440
3441 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3442 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3443 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3444 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3445 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3446 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3447 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3448 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3449 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3450 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3451 setting afterwards.
3452
3453 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3454 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3455 @cindex output file name in linker script
3456 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3457 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3458 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3459 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3460 precedence.
3461
3462 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3463 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3464
3465 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3466 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3467 @cindex library search path in linker script
3468 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3469 @cindex search path in linker script
3470 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3471 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3472 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3473 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3474 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3475 the command line option are searched first.
3476
3477 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3478 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3479 @cindex first input file
3480 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3481 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3482 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3483 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3484 first file.
3485 @end table
3486
3487 @ifclear SingleFormat
3488 @node Format Commands
3489 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3490 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3491
3492 @table @code
3493 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3494 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3495 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3496 @cindex output file format in linker script
3497 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3498 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3499 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3500 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3501 line option takes precedence.
3502
3503 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3504 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3505 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3506 desired endianness.
3507
3508 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3509 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3510 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3511 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3512
3513 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3514 command:
3515 @smallexample
3516 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3517 @end smallexample
3518 This says that the default format for the output file is
3519 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3520 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3521 format.
3522
3523 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3524 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3525 @cindex input file format in linker script
3526 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3527 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3528 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3529 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3530 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3531 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3532 @end table
3533 @end ifclear
3534
3535 @node REGION_ALIAS
3536 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3537 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3538 @cindex region alias
3539 @cindex region names
3540
3541 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3542 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3543
3544 @smallexample
3545 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3546 @end smallexample
3547
3548 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3549 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3550 to memory regions. An example follows.
3551
3552 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3553 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3554 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3555 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3556 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3557 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3558 sections:
3559
3560 @itemize @bullet
3561 @item
3562 @code{.text} program code;
3563 @item
3564 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3565 @item
3566 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3567 @item
3568 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3569 @end itemize
3570
3571 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3572 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3573 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3574 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3575 @code{C}:
3576 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3577 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3578 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3579 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3580 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3581 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3582 @end multitable
3583 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3584 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3585 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3586 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3587
3588 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3589 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3590 memory layout:
3591 @smallexample
3592 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3593
3594 SECTIONS
3595 @{
3596 .text :
3597 @{
3598 *(.text)
3599 @} > REGION_TEXT
3600 .rodata :
3601 @{
3602 *(.rodata)
3603 rodata_end = .;
3604 @} > REGION_RODATA
3605 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3606 @{
3607 data_start = .;
3608 *(.data)
3609 @} > REGION_DATA
3610 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3611 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3612 .bss :
3613 @{
3614 *(.bss)
3615 @} > REGION_BSS
3616 @}
3617 @end smallexample
3618
3619 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3620 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3621 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3622 @table @code
3623 @item A
3624 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3625 @smallexample
3626 MEMORY
3627 @{
3628 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3629 @}
3630
3631 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3632 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3633 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3634 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3635 @end smallexample
3636 @item B
3637 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3638 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3639 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3640 @smallexample
3641 MEMORY
3642 @{
3643 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3644 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3645 @}
3646
3647 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3648 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3649 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3650 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3651 @end smallexample
3652 @item C
3653 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3654 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3655 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3656 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3657 @smallexample
3658 MEMORY
3659 @{
3660 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3661 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3662 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3663 @}
3664
3665 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3666 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3667 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3668 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3669 @end smallexample
3670 @end table
3671
3672 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3673 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3674 necessary:
3675 @smallexample
3676 #include <string.h>
3677
3678 extern char data_start [];
3679 extern char data_size [];
3680 extern char data_load_start [];
3681
3682 void copy_data(void)
3683 @{
3684 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3685 @{
3686 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3687 @}
3688 @}
3689 @end smallexample
3690
3691 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3692 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3693 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3694
3695 @table @code
3696 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3697 @kindex ASSERT
3698 @cindex assertion in linker script
3699 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3700 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3701
3702 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3703 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3704 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3705 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3706 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3707
3708 @smallexample
3709 .stack :
3710 @{
3711 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3712 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3713 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3714 @}
3715 @end smallexample
3716
3717 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3718 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3719 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3720
3721 @smallexample
3722 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3723 .stack :
3724 @{
3725 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3726 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3727 @}
3728 @end smallexample
3729
3730 will work.
3731
3732 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3733 @kindex EXTERN
3734 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3735 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3736 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3737 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3738 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3739 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3740
3741 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3742 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3743 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3744 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3745 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3746 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3747
3748 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3749 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3750 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3751 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3752 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3753 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3754
3755 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3756 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3757 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3758 @cindex section groups
3759 @cindex COMDAT
3760 This command has the same effect as the
3761 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3762 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3763 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3764 specified (@samp{-r}).
3765
3766 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3767 @kindex INSERT
3768 @cindex insert user script into default script
3769 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3770 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3771 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3772 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3773 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3774 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3775 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3776 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3777 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3778 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3779 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3780 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3781 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3782
3783 @smallexample
3784 SECTIONS
3785 @{
3786 OVERLAY :
3787 @{
3788 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3789 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3790 @}
3791 @}
3792 INSERT AFTER .text;
3793 @end smallexample
3794
3795 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3796 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3797 @cindex cross references
3798 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3799 references among certain output sections.
3800
3801 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3802 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3803 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3804 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3805 a function defined in the other section.
3806
3807 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3808 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3809 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3810 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3811 names.
3812
3813 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3814 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3815 @cindex cross references
3816 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3817 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3818
3819 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3820 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3821 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3822 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3823 must never call back.
3824
3825 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3826 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3827 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3828 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3829 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3830 names, not input section names.
3831
3832 @ifclear SingleFormat
3833 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3834 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3835 @cindex machine architecture
3836 @cindex architecture
3837 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3838 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3839 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3840 the @samp{-f} option.
3841 @end ifclear
3842
3843 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3844 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3845 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3846 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3847 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3848 @xref{Expression Section}.
3849 @end table
3850
3851 @node Assignments
3852 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3853 @cindex assignment in scripts
3854 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3855 @cindex variables, defining
3856 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3857 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3858
3859 @menu
3860 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3861 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3862 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3863 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3864 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3865 @end menu
3866
3867 @node Simple Assignments
3868 @subsection Simple Assignments
3869
3870 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3871
3872 @table @code
3873 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3874 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3875 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3876 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3877 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3878 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3879 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3880 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3881 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3882 @end table
3883
3884 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3885 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3886 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3887
3888 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3889 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3890
3891 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3892
3893 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3894
3895 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3896 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3897 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3898
3899 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3900 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3901
3902 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3903 assignments may be used:
3904
3905 @smallexample
3906 floating_point = 0;
3907 SECTIONS
3908 @{
3909 .text :
3910 @{
3911 *(.text)
3912 _etext = .;
3913 @}
3914 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3915 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3916 @}
3917 @end smallexample
3918 @noindent
3919 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3920 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3921 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3922 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3923 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3924
3925 @node HIDDEN
3926 @subsection HIDDEN
3927 @cindex HIDDEN
3928 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3929 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3930
3931 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3932 @code{HIDDEN}:
3933
3934 @smallexample
3935 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3936 SECTIONS
3937 @{
3938 .text :
3939 @{
3940 *(.text)
3941 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3942 @}
3943 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3944 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3945 @}
3946 @end smallexample
3947 @noindent
3948 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3949
3950 @node PROVIDE
3951 @subsection PROVIDE
3952 @cindex PROVIDE
3953 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3954 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3955 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3956 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3957 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3958 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3959 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3960 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3961
3962 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3963 @smallexample
3964 SECTIONS
3965 @{
3966 .text :
3967 @{
3968 *(.text)
3969 _etext = .;
3970 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3971 @}
3972 @}
3973 @end smallexample
3974
3975 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3976 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3977 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3978 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3979 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3980 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3981
3982 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3983 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3984 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3985 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3986 hidden and won't be exported.
3987
3988 @node Source Code Reference
3989 @subsection Source Code Reference
3990
3991 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3992 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3993 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3994 symbol that does not have a value.
3995
3996 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3997 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3998 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3999 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4000 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4001 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4002 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4003 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4004
4005 @smallexample
4006 extern int foo;
4007 @end smallexample
4008
4009 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4010
4011 @smallexample
4012 _foo = 1000;
4013 @end smallexample
4014
4015 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4016 transformation has taken place.
4017
4018 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4019 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4020 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4021 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4022 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4023 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4024 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4025
4026 @smallexample
4027 int foo = 1000;
4028 @end smallexample
4029
4030 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4031 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4032 number 1000 is initially stored.
4033
4034 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4035 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4036 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4037 So:
4038
4039 @smallexample
4040 foo = 1;
4041 @end smallexample
4042
4043 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4044 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4045 address. Whereas:
4046
4047 @smallexample
4048 int * a = & foo;
4049 @end smallexample
4050
4051 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4052 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4053 the variable @samp{a}.
4054
4055 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4056 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4057 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4058
4059 @smallexample
4060 foo = 1000;
4061 @end smallexample
4062
4063 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4064 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4065 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4066 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4067 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4068
4069 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4070 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4071 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4072 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4073 linker script contains these declarations:
4074
4075 @smallexample
4076 @group
4077 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4078 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4079 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4080 @end group
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4084
4085 @smallexample
4086 @group
4087 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4088
4089 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4090 @end group
4091 @end smallexample
4092
4093 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4094 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4095 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4096
4097 @smallexample
4098 @group
4099 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4100
4101 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4102 @end group
4103 @end smallexample
4104
4105 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4106 operators.
4107
4108 @node SECTIONS
4109 @section SECTIONS Command
4110 @kindex SECTIONS
4111 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4112 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4113
4114 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4115 @smallexample
4116 SECTIONS
4117 @{
4118 @var{sections-command}
4119 @var{sections-command}
4120 @dots{}
4121 @}
4122 @end smallexample
4123
4124 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4125
4126 @itemize @bullet
4127 @item
4128 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4129 @item
4130 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4131 @item
4132 an output section description
4133 @item
4134 an overlay description
4135 @end itemize
4136
4137 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4138 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4139 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4140 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4141 the layout of the output file.
4142
4143 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4144 below.
4145
4146 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4147 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4148 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4149 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4150 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4151 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4152
4153 @menu
4154 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4155 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4156 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4157 * Input Section:: Input section description
4158 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4159 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4160 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4161 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4162 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4163 @end menu
4164
4165 @node Output Section Description
4166 @subsection Output Section Description
4167 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4168 @smallexample
4169 @group
4170 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4171 [AT(@var{lma})]
4172 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4173 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4174 [@var{constraint}]
4175 @{
4176 @var{output-section-command}
4177 @var{output-section-command}
4178 @dots{}
4179 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4180 @end group
4181 @end smallexample
4182
4183 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4184
4185 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4186 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4187 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4188 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4189 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4190
4191 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4192
4193 @itemize @bullet
4194 @item
4195 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4196 @item
4197 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4198 @item
4199 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4200 @item
4201 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4202 @end itemize
4203
4204 @node Output Section Name
4205 @subsection Output Section Name
4206 @cindex name, section
4207 @cindex section name
4208 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4209 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4210 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4211 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4212 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4213 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4214 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4215 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4216 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4217 commas must be quoted.
4218
4219 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4220 Discarding}.
4221
4222 @node Output Section Address
4223 @subsection Output Section Address
4224 @cindex address, section
4225 @cindex section address
4226 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4227 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4228 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4229
4230 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4231 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4232 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4233 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4234 contained within the output section.
4235
4236 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4237
4238 @itemize @bullet
4239 @item
4240 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4241 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4242 in that region.
4243
4244 @item
4245 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4246 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4247 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4248 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4249
4250 @item
4251 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4252 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4253 counter.
4254 @end itemize
4255
4256 @noindent
4257 For example:
4258
4259 @smallexample
4260 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4261 @end smallexample
4262
4263 @noindent
4264 and
4265
4266 @smallexample
4267 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4268 @end smallexample
4269
4270 @noindent
4271 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4272 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4273 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4274 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4275 input sections.
4276
4277 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4278 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4279 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4280 do something like this:
4281 @smallexample
4282 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4283 @end smallexample
4284 @noindent
4285 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4286 aligned upward to the specified value.
4287
4288 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4289 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4290 sections are ignored).
4291
4292 @node Input Section
4293 @subsection Input Section Description
4294 @cindex input sections
4295 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4296 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4297
4298 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4299 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4300 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4301 map the input files into your memory layout.
4302
4303 @menu
4304 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4305 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4306 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4307 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4308 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4309 @end menu
4310
4311 @node Input Section Basics
4312 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4313 @cindex input section basics
4314 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4315 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4316
4317 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4318 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4319
4320 The most common input section description is to include all input
4321 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4322 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4323 @smallexample
4324 *(.text)
4325 @end smallexample
4326 @noindent
4327 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4328 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4329 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4330 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4331 example:
4332 @smallexample
4333 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4334 @end smallexample
4335 @noindent
4336 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4337 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4338 placed inside the section list, for example:
4339 @smallexample
4340 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4341 @end smallexample
4342 @noindent
4343 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4344 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4345 more than one section, as described below.
4346
4347 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4348 @smallexample
4349 *(.text .rdata)
4350 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4351 @end smallexample
4352 @noindent
4353 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4354 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4355 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4356 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4357 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4358 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4359
4360 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4361 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4362 immediately following section, for example:
4363 @smallexample
4364 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4365 @end smallexample
4366 @noindent
4367 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4368 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4369 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4370 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4371 could be modified to:
4372 @smallexample
4373 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4374 @end smallexample
4375 @noindent
4376 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4377 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4378 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4379 @smallexample
4380 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4381 @end smallexample
4382
4383 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4384 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4385 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4386 @smallexample
4387 data.o(.data)
4388 @end smallexample
4389
4390 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4391 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4392
4393 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4394
4395 @smallexample
4396 @group
4397 SECTIONS @{
4398 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4399 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4400 @}
4401 @end group
4402 @end smallexample
4403
4404 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4405 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4406 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4407 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4408 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4409
4410 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4411 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4412 with no whitespace around the colon.
4413
4414 @table @samp
4415 @item archive:file
4416 matches file within archive
4417 @item archive:
4418 matches the whole archive
4419 @item :file
4420 matches file but not one in an archive
4421 @end table
4422
4423 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4424 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4425 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4426 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4427 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4428 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4429 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4430 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4431 command.
4432
4433 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4434 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4435 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4436 @smallexample
4437 data.o
4438 @end smallexample
4439
4440 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4441 and does not contain any wild card
4442 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4443 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4444 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4445 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4446 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4447 the archive search path.
4448
4449 @node Input Section Wildcards
4450 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4451 @cindex input section wildcards
4452 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4453 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4454 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4455 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4456 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4457
4458 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4459 pattern for the file name.
4460
4461 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4462
4463 @table @samp
4464 @item *
4465 matches any number of characters
4466 @item ?
4467 matches any single character
4468 @item [@var{chars}]
4469 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4470 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4471 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4472 @item \
4473 quotes the following character
4474 @end table
4475
4476 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4477 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4478 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4479 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4480 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4481 a @samp{/} character.
4482
4483 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4484 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4485 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4486
4487 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4488 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4489 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4490 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4491 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4492 @smallexample
4493 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4494 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4495 @end smallexample
4496
4497 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4498 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4499 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4500 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4501 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4502 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4503 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4504
4505 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4506 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4507 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4508 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4509 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4510 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4511
4512 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4513 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4514 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4515 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4516 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4517
4518 @cindex SORT
4519 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4520
4521 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4522 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4523
4524 @enumerate
4525 @item
4526 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4527 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4528 sections have the same name.
4529 @item
4530 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4531 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4532 sections have the same alignment.
4533 @item
4534 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4535 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4536 @item
4537 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4538 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4539 @item
4540 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4541 @end enumerate
4542
4543 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4544 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4545 takes precedence over the command line option.
4546
4547 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4548 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4549 treated as nested sorting command.
4550
4551 @enumerate
4552 @item
4553 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4554 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4555 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4556 @item
4557 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4558 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4559 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4560 @end enumerate
4561
4562 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4563 command line option will be ignored.
4564
4565 @cindex SORT_NONE
4566 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4567 section sorting option.
4568
4569 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4570 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4571 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4572
4573 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4574 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4575 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4576 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4577 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4578 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4579 @smallexample
4580 @group
4581 SECTIONS @{
4582 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4583 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4584 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4585 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4586 @}
4587 @end group
4588 @end smallexample
4589
4590 @node Input Section Common
4591 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4592 @cindex common symbol placement
4593 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4594 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4595 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4596 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4597 named @samp{COMMON}.
4598
4599 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4600 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4601 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4602 input files are placed in another section.
4603
4604 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4605 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4606 @smallexample
4607 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4608 @end smallexample
4609
4610 @cindex scommon section
4611 @cindex small common symbols
4612 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4613 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4614 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4615 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4616 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4617 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4618 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4619 locations.
4620
4621 @cindex [COMMON]
4622 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4623 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4624 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4625
4626 @node Input Section Keep
4627 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4628 @cindex KEEP
4629 @cindex garbage collection
4630 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4631 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4632 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4633 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4634 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4635
4636 @node Input Section Example
4637 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4638 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4639 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4640 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4641 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4642 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4643 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4644 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4645 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4646 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4647
4648 @smallexample
4649 @group
4650 SECTIONS @{
4651 outputa 0x10000 :
4652 @{
4653 all.o
4654 foo.o (.input1)
4655 @}
4656 @end group
4657 @group
4658 outputb :
4659 @{
4660 foo.o (.input2)
4661 foo1.o (.input1)
4662 @}
4663 @end group
4664 @group
4665 outputc :
4666 @{
4667 *(.input1)
4668 *(.input2)
4669 @}
4670 @}
4671 @end group
4672 @end smallexample
4673
4674 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4675 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4676 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4677 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4678 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4679 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4680 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4681
4682 @node Output Section Data
4683 @subsection Output Section Data
4684 @cindex data
4685 @cindex section data
4686 @cindex output section data
4687 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4688 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4689 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4690 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4691 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4692 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4693 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4694 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4695 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4696 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4697 counter.
4698
4699 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4700 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4701 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4702 stored.
4703
4704 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4705 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4706 @smallexample
4707 BYTE(1)
4708 LONG(addr)
4709 @end smallexample
4710
4711 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4712 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4713 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4714 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4715 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4716
4717 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4718 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4719 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4720 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4721 endianness of the first input object file.
4722
4723 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4724 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4725 @smallexample
4726 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4727 @end smallexample
4728 whereas this will work:
4729 @smallexample
4730 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4731 @end smallexample
4732
4733 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4734 @cindex holes, filling
4735 @cindex unspecified memory
4736 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4737 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4738 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4739 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4740 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4741 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4742 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4743 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4744 different parts of an output section.
4745
4746 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4747 value @samp{0x90}:
4748 @smallexample
4749 FILL(0x90909090)
4750 @end smallexample
4751
4752 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4753 section attribute, but it only affects the
4754 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4755 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4756 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4757 expression.
4758
4759 @node Output Section Keywords
4760 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4761 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4762 commands.
4763
4764 @table @code
4765 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4766 @cindex input filename symbols
4767 @cindex filename symbols
4768 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4769 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4770 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4771 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4772 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4773
4774 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4775 normally used for any other object file format.
4776
4777 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4778 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4779 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4780 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4781 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4782 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4783 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4784 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4785 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4786 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4787 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4788 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4789 ignored for other object file formats.
4790
4791 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4792 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4793 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4794 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4795 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4796 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4797 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4798 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4799 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4800 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4801 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4802 @code{exit}.
4803
4804 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4805 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4806 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4807 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4808 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4809 runtime code expects to see.
4810
4811 @smallexample
4812 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4813 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4814 *(.ctors)
4815 LONG(0)
4816 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4817 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4818 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4819 *(.dtors)
4820 LONG(0)
4821 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4822 @end smallexample
4823
4824 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4825 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4826 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4827 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4828 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4829 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4830 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4831 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4832
4833 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4834 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4835 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4836 scripts.
4837
4838 @end table
4839
4840 @node Output Section Discarding
4841 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4842 @cindex discarding sections
4843 @cindex sections, discarding
4844 @cindex removing sections
4845 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4846 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4847 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4848 @smallexample
4849 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4850 @end smallexample
4851 @noindent
4852 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4853 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4854 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4855 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4856 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4857 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4858 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4859 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4860 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4861
4862 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4863 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4864 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4865 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4866 section is discarded.
4867
4868 @cindex /DISCARD/
4869 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4870 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4871 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4872
4873 @node Output Section Attributes
4874 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4875 @cindex output section attributes
4876 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4877 like this:
4878
4879 @smallexample
4880 @group
4881 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4882 [AT(@var{lma})]
4883 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4884 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4885 [@var{constraint}]
4886 @{
4887 @var{output-section-command}
4888 @var{output-section-command}
4889 @dots{}
4890 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4891 @end group
4892 @end smallexample
4893
4894 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4895 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4896 remaining section attributes.
4897
4898 @menu
4899 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4900 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4901 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4902 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4903 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4904 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4905 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4906 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4907 @end menu
4908
4909 @node Output Section Type
4910 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4911 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4912 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4913
4914 @table @code
4915 @item NOLOAD
4916 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4917 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4918 @item DSECT
4919 @itemx COPY
4920 @itemx INFO
4921 @itemx OVERLAY
4922 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4923 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4924 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4925 section when the program is run.
4926 @end table
4927
4928 @kindex NOLOAD
4929 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4930 @cindex loading, preventing
4931 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4932 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4933 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4934 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4935 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4936 @smallexample
4937 @group
4938 SECTIONS @{
4939 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4940 @dots{}
4941 @}
4942 @end group
4943 @end smallexample
4944
4945 @node Output Section LMA
4946 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4947 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4948 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4949 @cindex load address
4950 @cindex section load address
4951 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4952 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4953 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4954 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4955 address is optional.
4956
4957 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4958 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4959 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4960 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4961 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4962
4963 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4964 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4965 load address:
4966
4967 @itemize @bullet
4968 @item
4969 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4970 the LMA address as well.
4971
4972 @item
4973 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4974
4975 @item
4976 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4977 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4978 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4979 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4980 the last section in the located region.
4981
4982 @item
4983 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4984 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4985
4986 @item
4987 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4988 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4989 @end itemize
4990
4991 @cindex ROM initialized data
4992 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4993 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4994 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4995 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4996 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4997 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4998 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4999 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5000 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5001
5002 @smallexample
5003 @group
5004 SECTIONS
5005 @{
5006 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5007 .mdata 0x2000 :
5008 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5009 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5010 .bss 0x3000 :
5011 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5012 @}
5013 @end group
5014 @end smallexample
5015
5016 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5017 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5018 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5019 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5020 script.
5021
5022 @smallexample
5023 @group
5024 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5025 char *src = &_etext;
5026 char *dst = &_data;
5027
5028 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5029 while (dst < &_edata)
5030 *dst++ = *src++;
5031
5032 /* Zero bss. */
5033 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5034 *dst = 0;
5035 @end group
5036 @end smallexample
5037
5038 @node Forced Output Alignment
5039 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5040 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5041 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5042 @cindex output section alignment
5043 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5044 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5045 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5046
5047 @node Forced Input Alignment
5048 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5049 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5050 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5051 @cindex input section alignment
5052 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5053 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5054 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5055
5056 @node Output Section Constraint
5057 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5058 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5059 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5060 @cindex constraints on output sections
5061 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5062 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5063 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5064 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5065
5066 @node Output Section Region
5067 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5068 @kindex >@var{region}
5069 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5070 @cindex memory regions and sections
5071 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5072 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5073
5074 Here is a simple example:
5075 @smallexample
5076 @group
5077 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5078 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5079 @end group
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 @node Output Section Phdr
5083 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5084 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5085 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5086 @cindex program headers and sections
5087 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5088 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5089 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5090 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5091 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5092 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5093
5094 Here is a simple example:
5095 @smallexample
5096 @group
5097 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5098 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5099 @end group
5100 @end smallexample
5101
5102 @node Output Section Fill
5103 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5104 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5105 @cindex section fill pattern
5106 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5107 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5108 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5109 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5110 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5111 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5112 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5113 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5114 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5115 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5116 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5117 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5118 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5119
5120 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5121 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5122
5123 Here is a simple example:
5124 @smallexample
5125 @group
5126 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5127 @end group
5128 @end smallexample
5129
5130 @node Overlay Description
5131 @subsection Overlay Description
5132 @kindex OVERLAY
5133 @cindex overlays
5134 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5135 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5136 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5137 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5138 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5139 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5140 than another.
5141
5142 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5143 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5144 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5145 command is as follows:
5146 @smallexample
5147 @group
5148 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5149 @{
5150 @var{secname1}
5151 @{
5152 @var{output-section-command}
5153 @var{output-section-command}
5154 @dots{}
5155 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5156 @var{secname2}
5157 @{
5158 @var{output-section-command}
5159 @var{output-section-command}
5160 @dots{}
5161 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5162 @dots{}
5163 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5164 @end group
5165 @end smallexample
5166
5167 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5168 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5169 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5170 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5171 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5172 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5173
5174 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5175 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5176
5177 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5178 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5179 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5180 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5181 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5182 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5183
5184 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5185 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5186 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5187 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5188 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5189
5190 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5191 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5192 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5193 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5194 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5195 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5196 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5197
5198 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5199 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5200
5201 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5202 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5203 @smallexample
5204 @group
5205 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5206 @{
5207 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5208 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5209 @}
5210 @end group
5211 @end smallexample
5212 @noindent
5213 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5214 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5215 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5216 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5217 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5218 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5219
5220 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5221 like the following.
5222
5223 @smallexample
5224 @group
5225 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5226 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5227 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5228 @end group
5229 @end smallexample
5230
5231 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5232 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5233 example could have been written identically as follows.
5234
5235 @smallexample
5236 @group
5237 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5238 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5239 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5240 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5241 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5242 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5243 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5244 @end group
5245 @end smallexample
5246
5247 @node MEMORY
5248 @section MEMORY Command
5249 @kindex MEMORY
5250 @cindex memory regions
5251 @cindex regions of memory
5252 @cindex allocating memory
5253 @cindex discontinuous memory
5254 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5255 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5256
5257 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5258 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5259 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5260 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5261 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5262 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5263 around to fit into the available regions.
5264
5265 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5266 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5267 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5268 @code{MEMORY} is:
5269 @smallexample
5270 @group
5271 MEMORY
5272 @{
5273 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5274 @dots{}
5275 @}
5276 @end group
5277 @end smallexample
5278
5279 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5280 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5281 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5282 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5283 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5284 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5285 command.
5286
5287 @cindex memory region attributes
5288 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5289 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5290 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5291 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5292 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5293 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5294 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5295
5296 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5297 @table @samp
5298 @item R
5299 Read-only section
5300 @item W
5301 Read/write section
5302 @item X
5303 Executable section
5304 @item A
5305 Allocatable section
5306 @item I
5307 Initialized section
5308 @item L
5309 Same as @samp{I}
5310 @item !
5311 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5312 @end table
5313
5314 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5315 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5316 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5317 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5318 attributes.
5319
5320 @kindex ORIGIN =
5321 @kindex o =
5322 @kindex org =
5323 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5324 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5325 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5326 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5327 @code{ORG}).
5328
5329 @kindex LENGTH =
5330 @kindex len =
5331 @kindex l =
5332 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5333 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5334 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5335 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5336
5337 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5338 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5339 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5340 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5341 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5342 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5343 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5344 region.
5345
5346 @smallexample
5347 @group
5348 MEMORY
5349 @{
5350 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5351 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5352 @}
5353 @end group
5354 @end smallexample
5355
5356 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5357 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5358 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5359 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5360 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5361 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5362 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5363 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5364 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5365
5366 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5367 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5368 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5369
5370 @smallexample
5371 @group
5372 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5373 @end group
5374 @end smallexample
5375
5376 @node PHDRS
5377 @section PHDRS Command
5378 @kindex PHDRS
5379 @cindex program headers
5380 @cindex ELF program headers
5381 @cindex program segments
5382 @cindex segments, ELF
5383 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5384 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5385 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5386 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5387
5388 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5389 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5390 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5391 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5392 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5393
5394 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5395 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5396 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5397 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5398 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5399
5400 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5401 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5402 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5403
5404 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5405 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5406
5407 @smallexample
5408 @group
5409 PHDRS
5410 @{
5411 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5412 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5413 @}
5414 @end group
5415 @end smallexample
5416
5417 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5418 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5419 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5420 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5421 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5422 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5423
5424 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5425 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5426 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5427 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5428 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5429 Section Phdr}.
5430
5431 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5432 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5433 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5434 contain the section.
5435
5436 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5437 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5438 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5439 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5440 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5441 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5442 segment at all.
5443
5444 @kindex FILEHDR
5445 @kindex PHDRS
5446 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5447 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5448 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5449 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5450 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5451 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5452 these keywords.
5453
5454 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5455 value of the keyword.
5456
5457 @table @asis
5458 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5459 Indicates an unused program header.
5460
5461 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5462 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5463 the file.
5464
5465 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5466 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5467
5468 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5469 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5470 found.
5471
5472 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5473 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5474
5475 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5476 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5477 ABI.
5478
5479 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5480 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5481
5482 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5483 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5484
5485 @item @var{expression}
5486 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5487 be used for types not defined above.
5488 @end table
5489
5490 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5491 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5492 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5493 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5494 output section attribute.
5495
5496 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5497 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5498 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5499 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5500 header.
5501
5502 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5503 headers used on a native ELF system.
5504
5505 @example
5506 @group
5507 PHDRS
5508 @{
5509 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5510 interp PT_INTERP ;
5511 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5512 data PT_LOAD ;
5513 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5514 @}
5515
5516 SECTIONS
5517 @{
5518 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5519 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5520 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5521 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5522 @dots{}
5523 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5524 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5525 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5526 @dots{}
5527 @}
5528 @end group
5529 @end example
5530
5531 @node VERSION
5532 @section VERSION Command
5533 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5534 @cindex symbol versions
5535 @cindex version script
5536 @cindex versions of symbols
5537 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5538 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5539 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5540 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5541 shared library.
5542
5543 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5544 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5545 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5546
5547 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5548 @smallexample
5549 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5550 @end smallexample
5551
5552 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5553 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5554 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5555 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5556 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5557 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5558 library.
5559
5560 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5561 examples.
5562
5563 @smallexample
5564 VERS_1.1 @{
5565 global:
5566 foo1;
5567 local:
5568 old*;
5569 original*;
5570 new*;
5571 @};
5572
5573 VERS_1.2 @{
5574 foo2;
5575 @} VERS_1.1;
5576
5577 VERS_2.0 @{
5578 bar1; bar2;
5579 extern "C++" @{
5580 ns::*;
5581 "f(int, double)";
5582 @};
5583 @} VERS_1.2;
5584 @end smallexample
5585
5586 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5587 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5588 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5589 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5590 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5591 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5592 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5593 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5594 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5595 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5596
5597 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5598 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5599 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5600
5601 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5602 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5603 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5604
5605 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5606 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5607 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5608 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5609 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5610 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5611 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5612 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5613 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5614
5615 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5616 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5617 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5618 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5619
5620 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5621 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5622 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5623 won't.
5624
5625 @smallexample
5626 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5627 @end smallexample
5628
5629 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5630 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5631 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5632 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5633 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5634 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5635 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5636 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5637 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5638 search for each symbol reference.
5639
5640 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5641 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5642 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5643 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5644 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5645 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5646 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5647 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5648 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5649
5650 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5651 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5652 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5653 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5654 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5655 @smallexample
5656 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5657 @end smallexample
5658 @noindent
5659 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5660 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5661 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5662 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5663 takes precedence over a version script.
5664
5665 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5666 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5667 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5668 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5669 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5670
5671 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5672 source file. Here is an example:
5673
5674 @smallexample
5675 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5676 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5677 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5678 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5679 @end smallexample
5680
5681 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5682 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5683 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5684 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5685
5686 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5687 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5688 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5689 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5690 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5691 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5692
5693 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5694 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5695 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5696 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5697
5698 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5699
5700 @smallexample
5701 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5702 @end smallexample
5703
5704 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5705 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5706 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5707 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5708 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5709
5710 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5711 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5712 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5713 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5714 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5715 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5716 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5717 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5718 expect when you upgrade.
5719
5720 @node Expressions
5721 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5722 @cindex expressions
5723 @cindex arithmetic
5724 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5725 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5726 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5727 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5728
5729 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5730
5731 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5732 expressions.
5733
5734 @menu
5735 * Constants:: Constants
5736 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5737 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5738 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5739 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5740 * Operators:: Operators
5741 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5742 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5743 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5744 @end menu
5745
5746 @node Constants
5747 @subsection Constants
5748 @cindex integer notation
5749 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5750 All constants are integers.
5751
5752 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5753 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5754 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5755 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5756 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5757 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5758
5759 @cindex scaled integers
5760 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5761 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5762 @cindex suffixes for integers
5763 @cindex integer suffixes
5764 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5765 constant by
5766 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5767 @ifnottex
5768 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5769 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5770 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5771 @end ifnottex
5772 @tex
5773 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5774 @end tex
5775 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5776 respectively. For example, the following
5777 all refer to the same quantity:
5778
5779 @smallexample
5780 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5781 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5782 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5783 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5784 @end smallexample
5785
5786 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5787 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5788
5789 @node Symbolic Constants
5790 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5791 @cindex symbolic constants
5792 @kindex CONSTANT
5793 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5794 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5795
5796 @table @code
5797 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5798 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5799 The target's maximum page size.
5800
5801 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5802 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5803 The target's default page size.
5804 @end table
5805
5806 So for example:
5807
5808 @smallexample
5809 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5810 @end smallexample
5811
5812 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5813 supported by the target.
5814
5815 @node Symbols
5816 @subsection Symbol Names
5817 @cindex symbol names
5818 @cindex names
5819 @cindex quoted symbol names
5820 @kindex "
5821 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5822 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5823 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5824 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5825 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5826 @smallexample
5827 "SECTION" = 9;
5828 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5829 @end smallexample
5830
5831 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5832 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5833 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5834
5835 @node Orphan Sections
5836 @subsection Orphan Sections
5837 @cindex orphan
5838 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5839 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5840 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5841 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5842 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5843
5844 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5845 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5846 placed at the end of that output section.
5847
5848 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5849 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5850 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5851 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5852 one new output section.
5853
5854 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5855 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5856 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5857 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5858 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5859 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5860 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5861
5862 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5863 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5864 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5865
5866 @node Location Counter
5867 @subsection The Location Counter
5868 @kindex .
5869 @cindex dot
5870 @cindex location counter
5871 @cindex current output location
5872 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5873 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5874 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5875 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5876 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5877
5878 @cindex holes
5879 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5880 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5881 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5882 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5883 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5884
5885 @smallexample
5886 SECTIONS
5887 @{
5888 output :
5889 @{
5890 file1(.text)
5891 . = . + 1000;
5892 file2(.text)
5893 . += 1000;
5894 file3(.text)
5895 @} = 0x12345678;
5896 @}
5897 @end smallexample
5898 @noindent
5899 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5900 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5901 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5902 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5903 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5904 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5905
5906 @cindex dot inside sections
5907 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5908 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5909 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5910 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5911 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5912 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5913
5914 @smallexample
5915 SECTIONS
5916 @{
5917 . = 0x100
5918 .text: @{
5919 *(.text)
5920 . = 0x200
5921 @}
5922 . = 0x500
5923 .data: @{
5924 *(.data)
5925 . += 0x600
5926 @}
5927 @}
5928 @end smallexample
5929
5930 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5931 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5932 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5933 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5934 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5935 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5936 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5937 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5938
5939 @cindex dot outside sections
5940 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5941 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5942 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5943
5944 @smallexample
5945 SECTIONS
5946 @{
5947 start_of_text = . ;
5948 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5949 end_of_text = . ;
5950
5951 start_of_data = . ;
5952 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5953 end_of_data = . ;
5954 @}
5955 @end smallexample
5956
5957 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5958 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5959 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5960 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5961 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5962 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5963 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5964 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5965 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5966 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5967 as follows:
5968
5969 @smallexample
5970 SECTIONS
5971 @{
5972 start_of_text = . ;
5973 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5974 end_of_text = . ;
5975
5976 start_of_data = . ;
5977 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5978 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5979 end_of_data = . ;
5980 @}
5981 @end smallexample
5982
5983 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5984 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5985 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5986 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5987 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5988 section. So you could write:
5989
5990 @smallexample
5991 SECTIONS
5992 @{
5993 start_of_text = . ;
5994 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5995 end_of_text = . ;
5996
5997 . = . ;
5998 start_of_data = . ;
5999 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6000 end_of_data = . ;
6001 @}
6002 @end smallexample
6003
6004 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6005 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6006
6007 @need 2000
6008 @node Operators
6009 @subsection Operators
6010 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6011 @cindex arithmetic operators
6012 @cindex precedence in expressions
6013 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6014 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6015 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6016 @ifnottex
6017 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6018 @smallexample
6019 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6020 (highest)
6021 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6022 2 left * / %
6023 3 left + -
6024 4 left >> <<
6025 5 left == != > < <= >=
6026 6 left &
6027 7 left |
6028 8 left &&
6029 9 left ||
6030 10 right ? :
6031 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6032 (lowest)
6033 @end smallexample
6034 Notes:
6035 (1) Prefix operators
6036 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6037 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6038 @end ifnottex
6039 @tex
6040 \vskip \baselineskip
6041 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6042 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6043 \hrule
6044 \halign
6045 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6046 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6047 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6048 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6049 \noalign{\hrule}
6050 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6051 &highest&&&&&\cr
6052 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6053 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6054 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6055 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6056 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6057 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6058 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6059 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6060 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6061 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6062 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6063 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6064 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6065 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6066 \hrule}
6067 @end tex
6068 @iftex
6069 {
6070 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6071 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6072 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6073 }
6074 @end iftex
6075 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6076
6077 @node Evaluation
6078 @subsection Evaluation
6079 @cindex lazy evaluation
6080 @cindex expression evaluation order
6081 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6082 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6083
6084 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6085 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6086 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6087 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6088
6089 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6090 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6091 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6092 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6093
6094 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6095 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6096 allocation.
6097
6098 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6099 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6100
6101 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6102 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6103 following
6104 @smallexample
6105 @group
6106 SECTIONS
6107 @{
6108 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6109 @{ *(.text) @}
6110 @}
6111 @end group
6112 @end smallexample
6113 @noindent
6114 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6115 address}.
6116
6117 @node Expression Section
6118 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6119 @cindex expression sections
6120 @cindex absolute expressions
6121 @cindex relative expressions
6122 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6123 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6124 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6125 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6126 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6127 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6128 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6129 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6130 operations.
6131
6132 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6133 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6134 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6135 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6136 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6137 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6138 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6139 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6140 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6141 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6142 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6143 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6144 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6145 everywhere.
6146
6147 In the following simple example,
6148
6149 @smallexample
6150 @group
6151 SECTIONS
6152 @{
6153 . = 0x100;
6154 __executable_start = 0x100;
6155 .data :
6156 @{
6157 . = 0x10;
6158 __data_start = 0x10;
6159 *(.data)
6160 @}
6161 @dots{}
6162 @}
6163 @end group
6164 @end smallexample
6165
6166 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6167 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6168 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6169 section in the second two assignments.
6170
6171 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6172 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6173
6174 @itemize @bullet
6175 @item
6176 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6177 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6178 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6179 @item
6180 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6181 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6182 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6183 @item
6184 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6185 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6186 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6187 before applying the operator.
6188 @end itemize
6189
6190 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6191
6192 @itemize @bullet
6193 @item
6194 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6195 @item
6196 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6197 @item
6198 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6199 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6200 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6201 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6202 but an absolute address otherwise.
6203 @item
6204 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6205 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6206 section as the relative operand(s).
6207 @item
6208 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6209 conversions) is an absolute address.
6210 @end itemize
6211
6212 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6213 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6214 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6215 section @samp{.data}:
6216 @smallexample
6217 SECTIONS
6218 @{
6219 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6220 @}
6221 @end smallexample
6222 @noindent
6223 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6224 @samp{.data} section.
6225
6226 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6227 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6228
6229 @node Builtin Functions
6230 @subsection Builtin Functions
6231 @cindex functions in expressions
6232 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6233 use in linker script expressions.
6234
6235 @table @code
6236 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6237 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6238 @cindex expression, absolute
6239 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6240 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6241 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6242 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6243
6244 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6245 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6246 @cindex section address in expression
6247 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6248 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6249 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6250 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6251 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6252 the other two will be absolute:
6253 @smallexample
6254 @group
6255 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6256 .output1 :
6257 @{
6258 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6259 @dots{}
6260 @}
6261 .output :
6262 @{
6263 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6264 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6265 @}
6266 @dots{} @}
6267 @end group
6268 @end smallexample
6269
6270 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6271 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6272 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6273 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6274 @cindex round up location counter
6275 @cindex align location counter
6276 @cindex round up expression
6277 @cindex align expression
6278 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6279 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6280 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6281 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6282 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6283 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6284
6285 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6286 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6287 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6288 input sections:
6289 @smallexample
6290 @group
6291 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6292 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6293 *(.data)
6294 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6295 @}
6296 @dots{} @}
6297 @end group
6298 @end smallexample
6299 @noindent
6300 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6301 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6302 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6303 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6304
6305 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6306
6307 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6308 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6309 @cindex section alignment
6310 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6311 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6312 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6313 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6314 value in that section.
6315 @smallexample
6316 @group
6317 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6318 .output @{
6319 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6320 @dots{}
6321 @}
6322 @dots{} @}
6323 @end group
6324 @end smallexample
6325
6326 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6327 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6328 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6329 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6330 section.
6331
6332 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6333 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6334 This is equivalent to either
6335 @smallexample
6336 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6337 @end smallexample
6338 or
6339 @smallexample
6340 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6341 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6342 @end smallexample
6343 @noindent
6344 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6345 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6346 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6347 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6348 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6349 bytes in the on-disk file.
6350
6351 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6352 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6353 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6354 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6355 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6356
6357 @noindent
6358 Example:
6359 @smallexample
6360 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6361 @end smallexample
6362
6363 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6364 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6365 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6366 evaluation purposes.
6367
6368 @smallexample
6369 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6370 @end smallexample
6371
6372 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6373 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6374 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6375 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6376 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6377 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6378 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6379 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6380 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6381 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6382 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6383 section alignment.
6384
6385 @smallexample
6386 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6387 @end smallexample
6388
6389 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6390 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6391 @cindex symbol defaults
6392 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6393 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6394 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6395 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6396 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6397 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6398 existed, its value is preserved:
6399
6400 @smallexample
6401 @group
6402 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6403 .text : @{
6404 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6405 @dots{}
6406 @}
6407 @dots{}
6408 @}
6409 @end group
6410 @end smallexample
6411
6412 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6413 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6414 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6415
6416 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6417 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6418 @cindex section load address in expression
6419 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6420 Section LMA}).
6421
6422 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6423 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6424 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6425 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6426
6427 @kindex MAX
6428 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6429 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6430
6431 @kindex MIN
6432 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6433 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6434
6435 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6436 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6437 @cindex unallocated address, next
6438 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6439 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6440 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6441 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6442
6443 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6444 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6445 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6446
6447 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6448 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6449 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6450 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6451 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6452 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6453 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6454 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6455 name.
6456
6457 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6458 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6459 @cindex section size
6460 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6461 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6462 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6463 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6464 @smallexample
6465 @group
6466 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6467 .output @{
6468 .start = . ;
6469 @dots{}
6470 .end = . ;
6471 @}
6472 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6473 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6474 @dots{} @}
6475 @end group
6476 @end smallexample
6477
6478 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6479 @itemx sizeof_headers
6480 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6481 @cindex header size
6482 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6483 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6484 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6485 choose, to facilitate paging.
6486
6487 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6488 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6489 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6490 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6491 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6492 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6493 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6494 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6495 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6496 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6497 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6498 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6499 @end table
6500
6501 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6502 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6503 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6504 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6505 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6506 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6507 linker will report an error.
6508
6509 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6510
6511 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6512 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6513 commands.
6514
6515 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6516 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6517 read. This can affect archive searching.
6518
6519 @ifset GENERIC
6520 @node Machine Dependent
6521 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6522
6523 @cindex machine dependencies
6524 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6525 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6526 functionality are not listed.
6527
6528 @menu
6529 @ifset H8300
6530 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6531 @end ifset
6532 @ifset I960
6533 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6534 @end ifset
6535 @ifset M68HC11
6536 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6537 @end ifset
6538 @ifset ARM
6539 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6540 @end ifset
6541 @ifset HPPA
6542 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6543 @end ifset
6544 @ifset M68K
6545 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6546 @end ifset
6547 @ifset MIPS
6548 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6549 @end ifset
6550 @ifset MMIX
6551 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6552 @end ifset
6553 @ifset MSP430
6554 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6555 @end ifset
6556 @ifset NDS32
6557 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6558 @end ifset
6559 @ifset NIOSII
6560 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6561 @end ifset
6562 @ifset POWERPC
6563 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6564 @end ifset
6565 @ifset POWERPC64
6566 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6567 @end ifset
6568 @ifset SPU
6569 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6570 @end ifset
6571 @ifset TICOFF
6572 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6573 @end ifset
6574 @ifset WIN32
6575 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6576 @end ifset
6577 @ifset XTENSA
6578 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6579 @end ifset
6580 @end menu
6581 @end ifset
6582
6583 @ifset H8300
6584 @ifclear GENERIC
6585 @raisesections
6586 @end ifclear
6587
6588 @node H8/300
6589 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6590
6591 @cindex H8/300 support
6592 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6593 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6594
6595 @table @emph
6596 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6597 @item relaxing address modes
6598 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6599 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6600 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6601 respectively.
6602
6603 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6604 @item synthesizing instructions
6605 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6606 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6607 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6608 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6609 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6610 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6611 top page of memory).
6612
6613 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6614 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6615 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6616 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6617 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6618 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6619 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6620
6621 @item bit manipulation instructions
6622 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6623 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6624 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6625 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6626 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6627 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6628 the top page of memory).
6629
6630 @item system control instructions
6631 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6632 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6633 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6634 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6635 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6636 the top page of memory).
6637 @end table
6638
6639 @ifclear GENERIC
6640 @lowersections
6641 @end ifclear
6642 @end ifset
6643
6644 @ifclear GENERIC
6645 @ifset Renesas
6646 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6647 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6648 @node Renesas
6649 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6650
6651 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6652 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6653 options are required for these chips.
6654 @end ifset
6655 @end ifclear
6656
6657 @ifset I960
6658 @ifclear GENERIC
6659 @raisesections
6660 @end ifclear
6661
6662 @node i960
6663 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6664
6665 @cindex i960 support
6666
6667 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6668 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6669 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6670 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6671 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6672 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6673 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6674
6675 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6676 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6677 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6678 the names
6679
6680 @smallexample
6681 @group
6682 try
6683 libtry.a
6684 tryca
6685 libtryca.a
6686 @end group
6687 @end smallexample
6688
6689 @noindent
6690 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6691 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6692
6693 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6694 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6695 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6696 specifies a library.
6697
6698 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6699 @cindex relaxing on i960
6700 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6701 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6702 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6703 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6704 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6705 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6706 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6707 not itself call any subroutines).
6708
6709 @ifclear GENERIC
6710 @lowersections
6711 @end ifclear
6712 @end ifset
6713
6714 @ifset ARM
6715 @ifclear GENERIC
6716 @raisesections
6717 @end ifclear
6718
6719 @ifset M68HC11
6720 @ifclear GENERIC
6721 @raisesections
6722 @end ifclear
6723
6724 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6725 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6726
6727 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6728
6729 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6730
6731 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6732 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6733
6734 @table @emph
6735 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6736 @item relaxing address modes
6737 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6738 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6739 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6740 respectively.
6741
6742 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6743 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6744 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6745
6746 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6747 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6748 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6749 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6750 @code{bset} instructions.
6751
6752 @end table
6753
6754 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6755
6756 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6757 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6758 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6759 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6760 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6761 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6762 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6763 point to the function trampoline.
6764
6765 @ifclear GENERIC
6766 @lowersections
6767 @end ifclear
6768 @end ifset
6769
6770 @node ARM
6771 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6772
6773 @cindex ARM interworking support
6774 @kindex --support-old-code
6775 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6776 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6777 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6778 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6779 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6780 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6781 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6782 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6783 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6784 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6785
6786 @cindex thumb entry point
6787 @cindex entry point, thumb
6788 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6789 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6790 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6791 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6792 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6793 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6794
6795 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6796 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6797 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6798 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6799 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6800 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6801
6802 @cindex BE8
6803 @kindex --be8
6804 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6805 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6806 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6807 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6808 little-endian code.
6809
6810 @cindex TARGET1
6811 @kindex --target1-rel
6812 @kindex --target1-abs
6813 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6814 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6815 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6816 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6817
6818 @cindex TARGET2
6819 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6820 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6821 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6822 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6823 @table @samp
6824 @item rel
6825 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6826 @item abs
6827 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6828 @item got-rel
6829 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6830 @end table
6831
6832 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6833 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6834 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6835 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6836 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6837 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6838
6839 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6840 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6841 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6842
6843 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6844 relocations are ignored.
6845
6846 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6847 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6848 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6849 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6850
6851 @smallexample
6852 TST rM, #1
6853 MOVEQ PC, rM
6854 BX Rn
6855 @end smallexample
6856
6857 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6858 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6859 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6860
6861 @cindex USE_BLX
6862 @kindex --use-blx
6863 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6864 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6865 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6866 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6867 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6868
6869 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6870 specify it if you are using that target.
6871
6872 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6873 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6874 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6875 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6876 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6877 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6878 the support code can read the intended values.
6879
6880 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6881 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6882 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6883 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6884 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6885 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6886
6887 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6888 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6889 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6890 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6891 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6892 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6893
6894 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6895 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6896 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6897 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6898 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6899 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6900 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6901
6902 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6903 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6904 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6905 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6906 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6907 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6908 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6909
6910 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6911 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6912 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6913
6914 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6915 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6916
6917 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6918 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6919 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6920 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6921 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6922 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6923 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6924 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6925
6926 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6927 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6928
6929 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6930 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6931 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6932 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6933 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6934
6935 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6936 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6937 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6938 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6939 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6940 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6941
6942 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6943 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6944
6945 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6946 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6947 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6948 occurs.
6949
6950 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6951 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6952 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6953 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6954 occurs.
6955
6956 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6957 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6958 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6959 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6960 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6961 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6962 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6963 not be diagnosed.
6964
6965 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6966 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6967 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6968 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6969 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6970 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6971 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6972
6973 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6974 @kindex --pic-veneer
6975 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6976 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6977 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6978 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6979
6980 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6981 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6982 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6983 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6984 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6985 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6986 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6987 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6988 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6989 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6990 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6991 where they should be placed.
6992
6993 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6994 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6995 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6996 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6997 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6998 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6999 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7000 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7001 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7002 from the input sections.
7003
7004 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7005 @samp{N = +1}.
7006
7007 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7008 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7009 otherwise.
7010
7011 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7012 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7013 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7014 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7015
7016 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7017
7018 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7019 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7020 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7021 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7022
7023 Please contact ARM for further details.
7024
7025 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7026 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7027 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7028 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7029
7030 @kindex --long-plt
7031 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7032 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7033 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7034 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7035
7036 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7037 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7038 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7039 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7040
7041 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7042 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7043 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7044 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7045 veneers in memory.
7046
7047 @kindex --cmse-implib
7048 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7049 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7050 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7051 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7052 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7053
7054 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7055 @cindex Input import library
7056 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7057 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7058 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7059 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7060 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7061 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7062 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7063 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7064 specified.
7065
7066 @ifclear GENERIC
7067 @lowersections
7068 @end ifclear
7069 @end ifset
7070
7071 @ifset HPPA
7072 @ifclear GENERIC
7073 @raisesections
7074 @end ifclear
7075
7076 @node HPPA ELF32
7077 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7078 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7079 @kindex --multi-subspace
7080 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7081 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7082 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7083 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7084 multiple sub-spaces.
7085
7086 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7087 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7088 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7089 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7090 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7091 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7092 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7093 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7094 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7095 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7096 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7097 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7098 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7099 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7100 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7101 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7102
7103 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7104 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7105 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7106 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7107
7108 @ifclear GENERIC
7109 @lowersections
7110 @end ifclear
7111 @end ifset
7112
7113 @ifset M68K
7114 @ifclear GENERIC
7115 @raisesections
7116 @end ifclear
7117
7118 @node M68K
7119 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7120
7121 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7122 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7123 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7124 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7125 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7126 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7127 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7128 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7129 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7130 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7131 support such GOTs.
7132 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7133 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7134 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7135 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7136
7137 @ifclear GENERIC
7138 @lowersections
7139 @end ifclear
7140 @end ifset
7141
7142 @ifset MIPS
7143 @ifclear GENERIC
7144 @raisesections
7145 @end ifclear
7146
7147 @node MIPS
7148 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7149
7150 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7151 @kindex --insn32
7152 @kindex --no-insn32
7153 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7154 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7155 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7156 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7157 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7158 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7159
7160 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7161 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7162 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7163 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7164 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7165 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7166 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7167 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7168 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7169 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7170 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7171 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7172
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @lowersections
7175 @end ifclear
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset MMIX
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @raisesections
7181 @end ifclear
7182
7183 @node MMIX
7184 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7185 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7186 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7187 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7188 can translate between the two formats.
7189
7190 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7191 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7192 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7193 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7194 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7195 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7196 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7197 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7198
7199 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7200 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7201 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7202 of a section.
7203
7204 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7205 are left out from an mmo file.
7206
7207 @ifclear GENERIC
7208 @lowersections
7209 @end ifclear
7210 @end ifset
7211
7212 @ifset MSP430
7213 @ifclear GENERIC
7214 @raisesections
7215 @end ifclear
7216
7217 @node MSP430
7218 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7219 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7220 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7221 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7222
7223 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7224 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7225
7226 @table @code
7227 @item @samp{.vectors}
7228 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7229
7230 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7231 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7232 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7233
7234 @item @samp{.infomem}
7235 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7236 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7237
7238 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7239 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7240 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7241
7242 @item @samp{.noinit}
7243 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7244
7245 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7246 @end table
7247
7248 @ifclear GENERIC
7249 @lowersections
7250 @end ifclear
7251 @end ifset
7252
7253 @ifset NDS32
7254 @ifclear GENERIC
7255 @raisesections
7256 @end ifclear
7257
7258 @node NDS32
7259 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7260 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7261 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7262 relaxes objects according to these options.
7263
7264 @table @code
7265 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7266 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7267
7268 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7269 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7270
7271 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7272 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7273
7274 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7275 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7276
7277 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7278 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7279
7280 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7281 Update the existing EX9 table.
7282
7283 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7284 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7285
7286 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7287 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7288
7289 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7290 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7291
7292 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7293 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7294 @end table
7295
7296 @ifclear GENERIC
7297 @lowersections
7298 @end ifclear
7299 @end ifset
7300
7301 @ifset NIOSII
7302 @ifclear GENERIC
7303 @raisesections
7304 @end ifclear
7305
7306 @node Nios II
7307 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7308 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7309 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7310
7311 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7312 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7313 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7314 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7315 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7316 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7317 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7318 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7319 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7320 larger than 256MB.
7321
7322 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7323 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7324 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7325 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7326 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7327 register as a temporary.
7328
7329 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7330 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7331 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7332
7333 @ifclear GENERIC
7334 @lowersections
7335 @end ifclear
7336 @end ifset
7337
7338 @ifset POWERPC
7339 @ifclear GENERIC
7340 @raisesections
7341 @end ifclear
7342
7343 @node PowerPC ELF32
7344 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7345 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7346 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7347 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7348 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7349 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7350 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7351 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7352 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7353 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7354 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7355 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7356 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7357
7358 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7359 @table @option
7360 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7361 @kindex --bss-plt
7362 @item --bss-plt
7363 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7364 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7365 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7366 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7367 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7368 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7369 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7370 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7371
7372 @kindex --secure-plt
7373 @item --secure-plt
7374 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7375 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7376 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7377 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7378 style BSS PLT.
7379
7380 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7381 @kindex --sdata-got
7382 @item --sdata-got
7383 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7384 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7385 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7386 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7387 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7388 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7389 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7390 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7391 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7392 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7393 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7394 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7395
7396 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7397 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7398 @item --emit-stub-syms
7399 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7400 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7401
7402 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7403 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7404 @item --no-tls-optimize
7405 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7406 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7407 disable the optimization.
7408 @end table
7409
7410 @ifclear GENERIC
7411 @lowersections
7412 @end ifclear
7413 @end ifset
7414
7415 @ifset POWERPC64
7416 @ifclear GENERIC
7417 @raisesections
7418 @end ifclear
7419
7420 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7421 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7422
7423 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7424 @table @option
7425 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7426 @kindex --stub-group-size
7427 @item --stub-group-size
7428 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7429 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7430 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7431 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7432 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7433 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7434 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7435 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7436 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7437 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7438 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7439 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7440 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7441 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7442
7443 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7444 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7445 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7446 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7447
7448 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7449 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7450 @item --emit-stub-syms
7451 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7452 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7453
7454 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7455 @kindex --dotsyms
7456 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7457 @item --dotsyms
7458 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7459 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7460 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7461 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7462 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7463 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7464 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7465 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7466 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7467 feature.
7468
7469 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7470 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7471 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7472 @item --save-restore-funcs
7473 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7474 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7475 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7476 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7477 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7478 link.
7479
7480 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7481 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7482 @item --no-tls-optimize
7483 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7484 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7485 disable the optimization.
7486
7487 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7488 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7489 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7490 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7491 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7492 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7493 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7494 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7495 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7496 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7497 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7498 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7499 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7500 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7501 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7502
7503 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7504 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7505 @item --no-opd-optimize
7506 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7507 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7508 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7509 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7510
7511 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7512 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7513 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7514 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7515 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7516 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7517 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7518
7519 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7520 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7521 @item --no-toc-optimize
7522 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7523 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7524 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7525 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7526 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7527 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7528 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7529 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7530 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7531 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7532 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7533 optimization.
7534
7535 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7536 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7537 @item --no-multi-toc
7538 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7539 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7540 where TOC
7541 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7542 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7543 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7544 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7545 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7546 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7547 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7548 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7549
7550 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7551 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7552 @item --no-toc-sort
7553 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7554 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7555 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7556 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7557 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7558 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7559 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7560 off this feature.
7561
7562 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7563 @kindex --plt-align
7564 @kindex --no-plt-align
7565 @item --plt-align
7566 @itemx --no-plt-align
7567 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7568 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7569 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7570 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7571 stubs are packed tightly.
7572
7573 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7574 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7575 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7576 @item --plt-static-chain
7577 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7578 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7579 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7580 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7581
7582 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7583 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7584 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7585 @item --plt-thread-safe
7586 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7587 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7588 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7589 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7590 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7591 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7592 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7593 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7594 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7595 default behaviour.
7596 @end table
7597
7598 @ifclear GENERIC
7599 @lowersections
7600 @end ifclear
7601 @end ifset
7602
7603 @ifset SPU
7604 @ifclear GENERIC
7605 @raisesections
7606 @end ifclear
7607
7608 @node SPU ELF
7609 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7610
7611 @cindex SPU ELF options
7612 @table @option
7613
7614 @cindex SPU plugins
7615 @kindex --plugin
7616 @item --plugin
7617 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7618
7619 @cindex SPU overlays
7620 @kindex --no-overlays
7621 @item --no-overlays
7622 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7623 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7624 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7625 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7626
7627 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7628 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7629 @item --emit-stub-syms
7630 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7631 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7632
7633 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7634 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7635 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7636 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7637 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7638 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7639
7640 @cindex SPU local store size
7641 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7642 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7643 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7644 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7645 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7646
7647 @cindex SPU
7648 @kindex --stack-analysis
7649 @item --stack-analysis
7650 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7651 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7652 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7653 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7654 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7655 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7656 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7657 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7658 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7659 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7660 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7661 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7662 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7663 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7664 and calls will be given.
7665
7666 @cindex SPU
7667 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7668 @item --emit-stack-syms
7669 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7670 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7671 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7672 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7673 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7674 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7675 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7676 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7677 @end table
7678
7679 @ifclear GENERIC
7680 @lowersections
7681 @end ifclear
7682 @end ifset
7683
7684 @ifset TICOFF
7685 @ifclear GENERIC
7686 @raisesections
7687 @end ifclear
7688
7689 @node TI COFF
7690 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7691 @cindex TI COFF versions
7692 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7693 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7694 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7695 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7696 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7697 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7698
7699 @ifclear GENERIC
7700 @lowersections
7701 @end ifclear
7702 @end ifset
7703
7704 @ifset WIN32
7705 @ifclear GENERIC
7706 @raisesections
7707 @end ifclear
7708
7709 @node WIN32
7710 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7711
7712 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7713 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7714 command line options mentioned here.
7715
7716 @table @emph
7717 @cindex import libraries
7718 @item import libraries
7719 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7720 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7721 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7722 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7723 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7724 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7725
7726 @item exporting DLL symbols
7727 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7728 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7729
7730 @table @emph
7731 @item using auto-export functionality
7732 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7733 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7734 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7735
7736 @itemize
7737 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7738 @item --exclude-symbols
7739 @item --exclude-libs
7740 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7741 @item --version-script
7742 @end itemize
7743
7744 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7745 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7746 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7747 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7748 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7749 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7750 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7751 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7752
7753 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7754 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7755 if either of the following are true:
7756
7757 @itemize
7758 @item A DEF file is used.
7759 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7760 @end itemize
7761
7762 @item using a DEF file
7763 @cindex using a DEF file
7764 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7765 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7766 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7767 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7768 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7769
7770 @example
7771 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7772 @end example
7773
7774 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7775 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7776
7777 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7778
7779 @example
7780 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7781
7782 EXPORTS
7783 foo
7784 bar
7785 _bar = bar
7786 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7787 var1 DATA
7788 doo = foo == foo2
7789 eoo DATA == var1
7790 @end example
7791
7792 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7793 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7794 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7795 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7796 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7797 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7798 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7799 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7800 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7801
7802 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7803 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7804 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7805
7806 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7807 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7808 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7809 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7810
7811 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7812 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7813 non-default base address for the image.
7814
7815 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7816 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7817 filename specified on the command line.
7818
7819 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7820
7821 @example
7822 EXPORTS
7823 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7824 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7825 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7826 @end example
7827
7828 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7829 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7830 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7831 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7832 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7833 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7834 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7835
7836 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7837
7838 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7839 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7840 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7841 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7842 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7843
7844 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7845 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7846 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7847 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7848
7849 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7850 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7851 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7852 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7853 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7854 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7855 application will behave unexpectedly.
7856
7857 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7858 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7859 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7860 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7861 the DLL without an import library.
7862
7863 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7864 other DEF file statements
7865
7866 @cindex creating a DEF file
7867 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7868 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7869
7870 @item Using decorations
7871 @cindex Using decorations
7872 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7873 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7874 declared as:
7875
7876 @example
7877 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7878 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7879 @end example
7880
7881 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7882 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7883 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7884 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7885
7886 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7887 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7888 instead:
7889
7890 @example
7891 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7892 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7893 @end example
7894
7895 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7896 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7897 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7898 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7899 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7900 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7901 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7902 information.
7903 @end table
7904
7905 @cindex automatic data imports
7906 @item automatic data imports
7907 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7908 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7909 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7910 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7911 code to these platforms, especially for large
7912 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7913 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7914 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7915 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7916 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7917 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7918 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7919 trigger the feature's use.
7920
7921 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7922 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7923
7924 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7925 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7926
7927 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7928 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7929 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7930 below.
7931
7932 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7933 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7934 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7935 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7936 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7937 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7938 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7939 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7940 references.
7941
7942 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7943 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7944 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7945 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7946 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7947 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7948 run without error on an older system.
7949
7950 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7951 enabled as needed.
7952
7953 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7954 @item direct linking to a dll
7955 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7956 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7957 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7958 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7959 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7960 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7961 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7962 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7963 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7964 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7965
7966 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7967 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7968 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7969 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7970 select the dll instead of an import library.
7971
7972
7973 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7974 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7975
7976 @example
7977 libxxx.dll.a
7978 xxx.dll.a
7979 libxxx.a
7980 xxx.lib
7981 cygxxx.dll (*)
7982 libxxx.dll
7983 xxx.dll
7984 @end example
7985
7986 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7987
7988 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7989 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7990 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7991 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7992 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7993
7994 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7995 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7996 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7997 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7998 could coexist on the same machine.
7999
8000 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8001 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8002 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8003
8004 @example
8005 bin/
8006 cygxxx.dll
8007 lib/
8008 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8009 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8010 @end example
8011
8012 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8013 done two ways:
8014
8015 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8016 @example
8017 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8018 @end example
8019
8020 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8021 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8022 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8023 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8024
8025 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8026 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8027 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8028 making the app/dll.
8029
8030 @example
8031 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8032 @end example
8033
8034 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8035
8036 @example
8037 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8038 @end example
8039
8040 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8041 perfectly legal
8042
8043 @example
8044 bin/
8045 cygxxx-5.dll
8046 lib/
8047 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8048 @end example
8049
8050 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8051 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8052 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8053
8054 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8055 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8056
8057 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8058 work with auto-imported data.
8059
8060 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8061 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8062 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8063 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8064 possible to do this without an import lib.
8065
8066 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8067 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8068 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8069 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8070
8071 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8072 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8073 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8074 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8075 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8076 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8077 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8078
8079 @item symbol aliasing
8080 @table @emph
8081 @item adding additional names
8082 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8083 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8084 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8085 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8086 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8087
8088 @example
8089 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8090
8091 EXPORTS
8092 foo
8093 _foo = foo
8094 @end example
8095
8096 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8097
8098 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8099 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8100
8101 @example
8102 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8103 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8104 @end example
8105
8106 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8107 symbols.
8108
8109 @item renaming symbols
8110 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8111 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8112 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8113 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8114 created). In the following example:
8115
8116 @example
8117 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8118
8119 EXPORTS
8120 _foo = foo
8121 @end example
8122
8123 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8124 @samp{_foo}.
8125 @end table
8126
8127 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8128 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8129 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8130 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8131 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8132 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8133 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8134 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8135 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8136 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8137 which is probably not what you wanted.
8138
8139 @cindex weak externals
8140 @item weak externals
8141 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8142 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8143 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8144 are three variants of weak externals:
8145 @itemize
8146 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8147 called lazy externals.
8148 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8149 This form is not presently implemented.
8150 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8151 implemented.
8152 @end itemize
8153 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8154 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8155 uses a default value.
8156
8157 @cindex aligned common symbols
8158 @item aligned common symbols
8159 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8160 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8161 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8162 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8163 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8164 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8165 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8166 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8167
8168 @end table
8169
8170 @ifclear GENERIC
8171 @lowersections
8172 @end ifclear
8173 @end ifset
8174
8175 @ifset XTENSA
8176 @ifclear GENERIC
8177 @raisesections
8178 @end ifclear
8179
8180 @node Xtensa
8181 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8182
8183 @cindex Xtensa processors
8184 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8185 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8186 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8187 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8188 example, with the command:
8189
8190 @smallexample
8191 SECTIONS
8192 @{
8193 .text : @{
8194 *(.literal .text)
8195 @}
8196 @}
8197 @end smallexample
8198
8199 @noindent
8200 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8201 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8202 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8203 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8204 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8205 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8206 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8207
8208 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8209 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8210 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8211 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8212 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8213 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8214 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8215 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8216 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8217 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8218 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8219 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8220
8221 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8222 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8223 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8224 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8225 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8226 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8227 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8228 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8229 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8230 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8231 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8232 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8233 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8234 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8235
8236 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8237 control the linker:
8238
8239 @cindex Xtensa options
8240 @table @option
8241 @item --size-opt
8242 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8243 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8244 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8245 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8246 preserve the correctness of the code.
8247 @end table
8248
8249 @ifclear GENERIC
8250 @lowersections
8251 @end ifclear
8252 @end ifset
8253
8254 @ifclear SingleFormat
8255 @node BFD
8256 @chapter BFD
8257
8258 @cindex back end
8259 @cindex object file management
8260 @cindex object formats available
8261 @kindex objdump -i
8262 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8263 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8264 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8265 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8266 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8267 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8268 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8269 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8270 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8271
8272 @cindex BFD requirements
8273 @cindex requirements for BFD
8274 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8275 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8276 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8277 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8278 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8279 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8280 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8281
8282 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8283 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8284 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8285 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8286
8287 @menu
8288 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8289 @end menu
8290
8291 @node BFD outline
8292 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8293 @cindex opening object files
8294 @include bfdsumm.texi
8295 @end ifclear
8296
8297 @node Reporting Bugs
8298 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8299 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8300 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8301
8302 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8303
8304 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8305 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8306 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8307 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8308 @command{ld}.
8309
8310 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8311 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8312
8313 @menu
8314 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8315 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8316 @end menu
8317
8318 @node Bug Criteria
8319 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8320 @cindex bug criteria
8321
8322 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8323
8324 @itemize @bullet
8325 @cindex fatal signal
8326 @cindex linker crash
8327 @cindex crash of linker
8328 @item
8329 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8330 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8331
8332 @cindex error on valid input
8333 @item
8334 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8335
8336 @cindex invalid input
8337 @item
8338 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8339 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8340 object files are correct.
8341
8342 @item
8343 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8344 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8345 @end itemize
8346
8347 @node Bug Reporting
8348 @section How to Report Bugs
8349 @cindex bug reports
8350 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8351
8352 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8353 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8354 recommend you contact that organization first.
8355
8356 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8357 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8358 distribution.
8359
8360 @ifset BUGURL
8361 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8362 @value{BUGURL}.
8363 @end ifset
8364
8365 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8366 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8367 fact or leave it out, state it!
8368
8369 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8370 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8371 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8372 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8373 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8374 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8375 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8376 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8377 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8378 and the most helpful.
8379
8380 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8381 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8382 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8383
8384 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8385 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8386 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8387 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8388
8389 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8390
8391 @itemize @bullet
8392 @item
8393 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8394 the @samp{--version} argument.
8395
8396 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8397 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8398
8399 @item
8400 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8401 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8402
8403 @item
8404 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8405 version number.
8406
8407 @item
8408 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8409 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8410
8411 @item
8412 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8413 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8414 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8415 sufficient.
8416
8417 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8418 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8419
8420 @item
8421 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8422 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8423 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8424 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8425 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8426 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8427 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8428 attachments are best.
8429
8430 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8431 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8432 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8433 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8434 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8435
8436 @item
8437 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8438 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8439
8440 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8441 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8442 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8443 a chance to make a mistake.
8444
8445 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8446 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8447 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8448 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8449 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8450 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8451 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8452 any conclusion from our observations.
8453
8454 @item
8455 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8456 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8457 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8458 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8459 context, not by line number.
8460
8461 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8462 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8463 @end itemize
8464
8465 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8466
8467 @itemize @bullet
8468 @item
8469 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8470
8471 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8472 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8473 changes will not affect it.
8474
8475 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8476 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8477 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8478 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8479
8480 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8481 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8482 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8483 less time, and so on.
8484
8485 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8486 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8487
8488 @item
8489 A patch for the bug.
8490
8491 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8492 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8493 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8494 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8495
8496 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8497 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8498 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8499 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8500 fixed.
8501
8502 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8503 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8504 help us to understand.
8505
8506 @item
8507 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8508
8509 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8510 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8511 @end itemize
8512
8513 @node MRI
8514 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8515 @cindex MRI compatibility
8516 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8517 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8518 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8519 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8520 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8521 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8522 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8523
8524 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8525 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8526 features to make use of them.
8527
8528 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8529 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8530
8531 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8532 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8533 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8534 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8535 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8536
8537 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8538
8539 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8540 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8541 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8542
8543 @table @code
8544 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8545 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8546 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8547 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8548 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8549 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8550 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8551 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8552 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8553 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8554 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8555
8556 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8557 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8558 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8559 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8560
8561 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8562
8563 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8564 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8565 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8566 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8567
8568 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8569 @item BASE @var{expression}
8570 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8571 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8572
8573 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8574 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8575 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8576 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8577
8578 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8579 @item END
8580 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8581
8582 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8583 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8584 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8585 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8586
8587 @enumerate
8588 @item
8589 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8590
8591 @item
8592 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8593
8594 @item
8595 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8596 @samp{COFF}
8597 @end enumerate
8598
8599 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8600 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8601 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8602 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8603
8604 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8605 same line, with no change in its effect.
8606
8607 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8608 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8609 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8610 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8611 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8612 command line.
8613
8614 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8615 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8616 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8617 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8618 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8619
8620 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8621 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8622 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8623 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8624 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8625 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8626 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8627 file, in the order specified.
8628
8629 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8630 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8631 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8632 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8633 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8634 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8635
8636 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8637 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8638 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8639 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8640 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8641 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8642 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8643 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8644 @end table
8645
8646 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8647 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8648 @include fdl.texi
8649
8650 @node LD Index
8651 @unnumbered LD Index
8652
8653 @printindex cp
8654
8655 @tex
8656 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8657 % meantime:
8658 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8659 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8660 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8661 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8662 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8663 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8664 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8665 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8666 \page\colophon
8667 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8668 @end tex
8669
8670 @bye
This page took 0.214068 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.